Tehnički priručnik
DVD Video Recorder
Broj modela.
DMR-EH55
DMR-EH56
Regionalni brojevi koji su
podržani
Regionalni brojevi su dodijeljeni DVD-u i
njegovom softwareu ovisno o zemlji porijekla.
• regionalni broj uređaja je “2”.
• Uređaj će reproducirati DVD-Video
označ
ene sa regijom “2” ili
“ALL”.
Primjer:
Web stranica:
http://www.panasonic-europe.com
2
ALL
2
3
5
Poš
tovani kupč
e
Zahvaljujemo na Vaš
em povjerenju i odluci da kupite
ovaj uređ
aj.Panasonic je jedna od vodeć
ih kompanija u
proizvodnji elektronike.Uvjereni smo da ć
ete u
potpunosti biti zadovoljni sa ovim uređ
ajem.
Prije bilo kakvog spajanja,ili upotrebe uređ
aja u cijelosti
prouč
ite ovaj priruč
nik,posebno sigurnosne upute
.
[Savjet]
“EB” na kutiji označ
ava Veliku Britaniju
EB
RQT7547-B
SUOMI
OPREZ!
CAUTION!
UREĐ
AJ SADRUTILIZES
ŽI LASER,MOLIMO
THIS
PRODUCT
A LASER. DA SE PRIDR ŽAVATE
UPUTA
U OVOME
ČNIKU
U PROTIVNOM
MO ŽE
US
E OF CONT
ROLS PRIRU
OR ADJUS
TMENTS
OR
DOĆI DO RADIJACIJE
I SLIČNIH OTHER
NEŽELJENIH
PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES
THA N THOS E
POSLJEDICA.NIKADA
NEINPOPRAVLJAJTE
SPECIFIED
HE REI N MAY SAMI
RE SULT
HAZAR DOUS
UREĐAJ,VEĆ
NOSITE OVLAŠTENIM SERVISERIMA
RADIATION
EXP GA
OSURE.
DO NOT OP EN COV ERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERV ICING TO QUALIFIED PE RS ONNEL.
UPOZORENJE:
WARNING:
ZAREDUCE
SMANJENJE
OPASNOSTI
OD ELEKTRIČ
NOG
TO
THE RISK
OF FIRE, ELECTRI
C SHOCK
ORUDARA
PRODUCT
DAMAGE,
DO
NOT
E
XPOSE
THIS
APPARATUS
ILI POŽARA MOLIMO DA POŠTUJETE UPUTE IZ
TO
RAIN, MOISTURE,
ORUREĐ
S PLAS
AND
PRIRUČ
NIKA,DA NEDRIPPING
IZLAŽ
ETE
AJHING
VLAZI
ILITHAT
NO
OBJECTS
FILLED
WITH
LI
QUIDS,
SUCH
AS
VASE
S,
TEMPERATURNIM RAZLIKAMA.
SHALL BE PL ACED ON THE APPARATUS .
CAUTION!
POZOR!
≥
NOT
I NS TALL OR P LACE
THIS
IN A BOOKCASE ,
!DONE
STAVLJAJTE
UREĐ
AJ UNIT
U ZATVORENI
BUILT-IN CABI
NE T OR
IN ANOTHER
CONFINED
S PACE
.
PROSTOR
ZBOG
TOGA
ŠTO JE
UREĐAJU
PRIJEKO
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL V ENTILATE D. TO PREV ENT
POTREBNA
RISK OF EL ECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
≥JAKO
DOBRA
VENTILACIJA,TE
ZATO
POSEBNO
OVERHEATING,
E NS
URE THAT CURTAINS
AN D ANY
VODITE
RAČ
UNA
O
TOME.
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
NE
STAVLJAJTE
PREDMETE NA UREĐAJ
VENTILATION
V ENTS.
POSEBNO
NE ONE
KOJI
SADRŽ
E VODU
ILINING
SLIČ
≥
DO NOT OBSTRUCT
THE
UNIT’S
V ENTILATION
OPE
S NE
TEKUČ
WITH NEWSPAP
INE
ERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAI NS , AND
SI MILAR
ITEMS.
≥NE
STAVLJAJTE
IZVORE S OTVORENIM
≥
DO NOT P LACENA
SOURCES
OF NAKED FLAMES , SUCH AS
PLAMENOM
UREĐAJ
LIGHTED
CANDLES,
ON THE
UNIT.E.
≥KAO
ŠTO
SU NPR.
SVIJEĆ
≥
DI SPOSE OF ODLAŽ
BATTE RIE
S IN
BATERIJE
ITE
U AN
ZAENVI
TO RONMENTALLY
PREDVIĐENE
FRIENDLY MANN ER.
PROSTORE
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
Namjenjeno za upotrebu u umjerenim klimatskim uvjetima.
Thi s product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
Mož
e doć
i do use.
kolizije
izmeđ
u mobilnihis apparent,
ure đ
aja i please
ovog
telephones
during
I f such
interference
sistema,ako
se ovakve
stvari
ajte razmak
increase
separation
between
t he ponavljaju
product andpoveć
the mobile
telephone.
izmeđ
u uređ
aja i mobitela.
The socket outlet shall be installed near t he equipment and
gdje uš
tekavate
uređ
ajplug
na gradsku
mrež
u mora
biti nashall
easMjesto
ily accessible
or the mains
or an appliance
coupler
remain
readily
operable.
priručnom mjestu,tj.na dohvat ruke.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMIN EN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ
KÄYTTÖOHJE ESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUO KAN 1
YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASE RSÄTE ILYLLE.
VAROITUS:
TULIPALO-, S ÄHKÖISKUVAARAN TAI TUOTETTA
KOHTAAVAN MUUN VAHI NGON VÄHENTÄMISE KS I EI
LAITE TTA SAA ALTIS TAA S ATEELLE, KOSTEUD ELLE,
VES IPISAROILLE TAI ROIS KEEL LE, EI KÄ NES TE TTÄ
SISÄLTÄV IÄ ESI NE ITÄ, KUTE N E SIMERKI KS I MALJAKOITA,
SAA AS ETTAA LAITTEEN PÄÄLLE.
VAROITUS!
≥
ÄLÄ ASENNA TAI LAITA TÄTÄ LAITETTA
KABINE TTITY YPPI SEEN KIRJAKAAPP IIN TAI MUUHUN
S ULJETTUUN TILAAN, JOTTA TUULE TUS ONNISTUISI.
VARMISTA, ETTÄ VE RHO TAI MIKÄÄN MUU MATERIAALI
EI HUONONNA TUULETUSTA, JOTTA VÄLTETTÄISIIN
Y LIKUUME NEMIS ESTA JOHTUVA SÄHKÖIS KU- TAI
TULIPALOVAARA.
≥
ÄLÄ P EITÄ LAITTEEN TUULETUSAUKKO JA
S ANOMALE HDELLÄ, PÖYTÄLIINALLA, VERHOLLA TAI
MUULLA VAS TAAVALLA ESINEE LLÄ.
≥
ÄLÄ ASETA PALAVAA KYNTTILÄÄ TAI MUUTA AVOTULEN
LÄHDE TTÄ LAITTEEN PÄÄLLE.
≥
HÄVITÄ PARIS TOT LUONTOA VAHINGOI TTAMATTO MALLA
TAVALLA.
TÄMÄ LAITE ON TARKOITETTU KÄYTETTÄVÄKSI LEUDOSSA
ILMASTOSSA.
Lait e tulee asett aa lähelle verkkopistorasiaa ja pistokkeen t äytyy
olla sellaisessa asennossa, että siihen on helppo tart tua
ongelman sat tuess a.
NORSK
ADVARSEL!
DE TTE PRODUKTET ANV ENDER EN LASER.
BETJE NING AV KONTROLLE R, JUSTE RINGER ELLE R
ANDRE I NNGREP ENN DE SOM ER BES KRE VET I DENNE
BRUKSANVIS NING, KAN FØRE TIL FARLI G BEST RÅLING.
DEKSLER MÅ IKKE ÅPNES , OG FORSØK ALDRI Å
REPARERE AP PARATET PÅ EGE NHÅND. ALT SERVICE OG
REPARA SJONS ARBEI D MÅ UTFØR ES AV KVALI FISERT
PERS ONELL.
ADVARSEL:
FOR Å REDUSERE FAREN FO R BRANN, ELE KTRISK STØT
ELLER S KADER PÅ PRODUKTET, MÅ DETTE APPARATE T
IKKE UTSETTES FOR REGN, FUKT IGHET, VANNDRÅP ER
ELLER VANNS PRUT. DET MÅ HELLER IKKE P LAS SERES
GJE NSTANDE R FYLT MED VANN, SLIK SO M
BLO MS TERVASER, OPPÅ AP PARATET.
ADVARSEL!
(Inside of produc t)
(Tuotteen sis ällä)
(Produktets innside)
≥
APPARATET MÅ IKKE PLASSERES I EN BOKHY LLE, E T
I NNE BY GGET KABINE TT ELLE R ET ANNET LUKK ET S TED
HVOR V ENTILASJONSFORHOLDENE ER
UTILSTRE KKELIG E. S ØRG FOR AT GARDINER E LLE R
LIGNE NDE IKKE FORVERRER
V ENTILASJONS FO RHOLDENE, SÅ RIS IKO FOR
E LEKTRISK SJOK K ELLER BRANN FORÅRS AKET AV
OV ERHE TING UNNGÅS .
≥
APPARATETS V ENTILASJON SÅPNINGER MÅ I KKE
DEKKES TI L MED AVISE R, BORDDUKER , GARDINER OG
LIGNENDE.
≥
PLASSE R IKKE ÅPEN ILD, SLIK SOM LEV ENDE LY S, OPPÅ
APPARATET.
≥
BRUKTE BATTERIER MÅ KA SSERES UTEN FARE FOR
MILJØ ET.
DETTE APPARATET ER BEREGNET TIL BRUK UNDER
MODERATE KLIMAFORHOLD.
RQT841 5
2
Keep the small memor y cards such(Unutar
as theproizvoda)
SD
Memory Card out of reach o f children. If
swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
Ut styret bør plasseres i nærheten av AC-stikkontakt en, og
støpslet må være lett tilgjengelig hvis det skulle oppstå
problemer.
Sadrž
aj
Početak
Editiranje
HDD, disk i informacije o kartici . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Važne napomene za snimanje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
HDD (Hard disk drive) održavanje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Održavanje diskova i kartica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Održavnje uređaja. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Uključeni dodaci . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Informacije o daljinskom upravljaču. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Vodičkontrola . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Daljinski upravljač. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Glavni uređaj. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Zaslon uređaja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
KORAK 1 Konekcije . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
KORAK 2 Opcije prijema kanala i opcije TV rezolucije . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
GUIDE Plus+ opcije sistema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
GUIDE Plus+ skidanje podataka. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Editiranje liste programa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Promjena opcija . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Podešavanje daljinskog upravljača i TV-a . . . . . . . . . .22
Uživanje u progresivnom videu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Snimanje
Snimanje televizijskih programa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Umetanje/Vađenje diskova. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specificiranje vremena prestanka snimanja . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opcije snimnaja za brzinsko kopiranje. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fleksibilno snimanje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reprodukcija dok snimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
26
26
27
27
Editiranje titlova/poglavlja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Editiranje titlova/ poglavlja i reprodukcija poglavlja . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Operacije . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Operacije poglavlja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Izrada, editiranje i reprodukcija playlista . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Izrada playlista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Editiranje i reprodukcija playlista/poglavlja. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Playliste operacija . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Operacije poglavlja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Editiranje slika . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Album i operacija sa slikama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Korištenje DELETE Navigat ora za brisanje. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Brisanje titlova . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Kopiranje
Kopiranje titlova ili playlisti. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Kopiranje. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Kopiranje koristeći listu kopiranja–Advanced Copy . .. . . . . . . . . 53
Kopiranje finaliziranih DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R i +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Kopiranje MPEG2 filmova sa SD kartice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Kopiranje fotografija
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Kopiranje koristeći listu kopiranja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Kopiranje svih slika sa kartice—Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Kopiranje sa video rekordera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Ru č
no snimanje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
DV automatsko snimanje (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Vremensko snimanje. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Korištenje G UI DE Plus+ sistema za vremensko snimanje . . . . 28
Operacije GUIDE Plus+ sistema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Korištenje S HOW VIEW broja za vremensko snimanje . . . . . . . . . 30
Ručno programiranje vremenskog snimnaj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Poništavanje snimanja kada je ono većpočelo . . . . . . .. . . . . . 31
Otpuštanje uređaja iz stand by-a za snimanje. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Savjeti o vremenskom snimanju. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Provjera, promjena ili brisanje programa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Relief Snimanje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Auto Renewal Snimanje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
VPS/PDC funkcija . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Snimanje prijenosa sa vanjskih uređaja . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Izrada vremenskih snimaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Snimanje sa digitalnog/ satelit skog receivera ili decodera . . . . . 33
Vremensko snimanje sa
vanjskom opremom (digital/satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . 33
Reprodukcija
Reprodukcija snimljenih sadrž
aja/
Reprodukcija diskova . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Operacije tijekom reprodukcije . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Promjena audia tijekom reprodukcije. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Reprodukcija DivX diskova,
MP3 diskovi i fotografije (JPEG/TIFF)
Dodatne funkcije
Operacije sa TV-om (Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HDD, disk i operacije s karticama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Osnovne procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Podešavanje zaštite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Davanje imena disku. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Brisanje svih titlova i playlista—Delete all title s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Brisanje svih sadržaja na kartici —Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Podešavanje pozadinskog stila–Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Odabiranje dali želite prikazivanje Top Menija prvo
–Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Omogućavanje diskovima da budu reproducirani na drugoj opremi
–Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Izrada Menija–Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Unos teksta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
FUNKCIJSKI prozor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Child Zaključavanje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Promjena opcija uređaja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Osnovne procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Zaključak opcija . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Traženje. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TV Sistem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ru čno podešavanje sata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
. . . . . . . . . . . .37
O DivX dis kovima,
MP3 dis kovima i fotografijama (JPEG/ TI FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Odabir datoteke za reprodukciju . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Reprodukcija DivX diskova . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Reprodukcija MP3 diskova . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Reprodukcija fotografija . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Korisne funkcije tijekom repordukcije . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Korištenje menija/Statusnih poruka. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Ostalo
Poruke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Često postavljana pitanja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Vodičkroz pogreške . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Termini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Specifikacije . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Sigurne upute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Korištenje menija . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Statusne poruke. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
RQT8415
3
HDD, diskovi i informacije o karticama
HDD i diskovi koje možete koristiti za snimanje i reprodukciju
DV D-RAM
≥
4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm
≥
2. 8 GB, 8 cm
Ha rd disk dri ve (HDD)
≥160 GB
Tip diska
Logo
–
[HDD]
Indicirano u ovom priru čniku
[ RAM]
DVD Video Format snimanja
Format snimanja
Podaci koje mogu biti
izvo đeni i snimljeni
Ovo je format koji vam omogućava snimanje,npr. televizijskog programa..
Fotografije
Re -wri table§1
Fotografije
Y
Reprodukcija na dr.player. §2
–
Kompatibilno sa brzinskim
–
snimanjem §3
Što možete učiniti na ovom uređaju (Y: Mo ž
e, t: Ne može)
Y
Y [CPRM (
Snimanje
Y
Samo na DVD-RAM compatible players.
Do 5X brzinsko snimanje.
81) compat ible discs only.]
sa M 1
M 2 za bilingualne
prijenose §4
Y
Y
Snimanje 16:9
rezolucije§4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Izrada i editiranje playliste
Tip diska
DVD-R
≥
4.7 GB, 12 c m
≥
1.4 GB, 8 cm
DVD-R DL
(dual layer on single side)
≥You cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
DVD-RW
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
Logo
Indicirano u ovom
priručniku
[-R] prije finalizacije
[DVD-V] nakon finalizacije
[-R]DL] prije finalizacije
[-RW‹V›] prije finalizacije
[DVD-V] nakon finalizacije
[DVD- V] nakon finalizacije
DVD-Video format
Format snimanja
Ovo je format koji vam omogućava snimanje,npr. televizijskog programa..
Podaci koje mogu biti
iz vođeni i snimljeni
Re -w ritable §1
t
Reprodukcija na dr.player §2 Nakon finalizacije (➡ 62, 81).
Kompatibilno sa brzinskim
snimanjem §3
Do 16X brzinskih diskova.
t
Samo na DVD-R DL kompatibilnim
pl ayerima nakon finaliziranja
(➡ 62, 81).
Do 4X brzinskih diskova.
Y
Nakon finalizacije (➡ 62,
81).
Do to 6X brzinskih diskova.
Što možete učiniti na ovom uređaju (Y: Mo ž
e, t: Ne može)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Snimanje M 1 i
M 2 bilingualnih
prijenosa§4
Snimanje u 16:9
rezoluciji§4
Izrada i editiranje
playliste
RQT841 5
4
t
t
t
t [Samo je jedno snim..(➡ 67, Bilingual
Audio Selection)]
t [Samo je jedno snim..(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [Samo je jedno snim.. (➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Select ion)]
t (Slika je snimljena u 4:3rezoluciji.)
t
t (Slika je snimljena u 4: 3
rezoluciji.)
t
t (Slika je snimljena u 4:3
rezolucij
t
(nastavlja se na sljedećoj stranici)
HDD i diskovi koje možete koristiti za snimanje i reprodukciju
(nastavljeno)
+R DL
(double layer na jednostr. disku)
≥Nemož
etedirektnosnimitina
+R DL diskove)
+R§5
≥
4.7 GB, 12 cm
Tip diska
Logo
–
–
[+R] prije finalizacije
Indicirano u
ovom priru čniku
[+RW]
[DVD-V] nakon finalizacije
+VR format
≥
Prijenos koji omogućava jedno snimanje ne može biti snimljeno
Re-writa bl e§1
V ideo
Video
V ideo
t
t
Y
Reprodukcija na drugim playerima §2
Samo nakon finaliziranja (➡ 62, 81).
Do 16X brzinskih diskova. .
Do 2.4X brzinskih diskova..
Što mo žete raditi na ovom uređaju (Y: Možete, t: Ne može)
Snimanje prijenosa koji
t
omogućuje jednu kopiju
Snimanje M 1 i
M 2 za bilingualne
prijenose §4
Snimanje u 16:9
rezoluciji
–
[+R]DL] prije finalizacije
[DVD-V] nakon finalizacije
Format snimanja
Podaci koje mogu biti
izvo đeni i snimljene
Kompatibilno sa
Brzinskim snimanjem §3
+RW
t [Samo je jedno snim.. (➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Select ion)]
t (Slika je snimljena u 4:3
rezoluciji)
Izrada playlisti i editiranje
Do 4X brzinskih diskova.. §6
t
t
t [Samo je jedno snim..(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [ Samo je jedno snim..(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t (Slika je snimljena u 4:3
rezoluciji)
t
t (Slika je snimljena u 4:3
rezoluciji)
t
t
≥Preporučujemo koriš
ptenje panasonicovih diskova. DVD-R.
≥Uređaj ne može snimati na diskove koristeći PAL i NTSC signale.
≥Uređaj svira CD-R/ CD-RW diskove (sudio snimljene diskove) koji su bili snimljeni pod ovim standardima: CD-DA, MP3 i Video CD. Zatvorite session ili finaliziraj
nakon snimanja.
Reprodukcija možda neće biti ostvariva na nekim diskovima CD-R ili CD-RW zbog
Finaliziranje
Proces koji omogućuje reprodukciju diskova na drugoj opremi. Nakon finaliziranja, disk postaje samo za čitanje,te se ne može na njemu više
editirati sadržaj. (➡ 62)
Formatiranje
Formatiranje je prroces na DVD-RAM za brisanje sadržaja. (➡ 61)
Ne mož
ete direktno snimati na DVD-R DL i +R DL diskove na ovom uređaju.
Snimite na HDD i potom kopirajte na disk.
Kod reprodukcije DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) i +R DL (Double La yer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL i +R DL diskovi imaju dvije površine na
jednoj strani diska.
Nije moguće kontinuirano snimati sa jednog na
drugi dloj. Snimanje završava kada se popuni jedan
sloj. Morate zatvoriti prvi sloj da bi mogli snimati na
drugi
Kod promjene slojeva:
Video i audi o se prekidaju
Drugi sloj
Dostupni prostor
Disk
Prvi sloj
DVD-R DL
+R DL
Title 1
Title 2
Smjer reprodukcije
∫
Modeovi snimanja i vremena snimanja ➡ 25
RQT8415
5
HDD, disk i informacije o karticama
Diskovi discs (12 cm/8 cm)
Play-only
Tip type
diska
Disc
Logo
DVD-Video
DVD-V ideo
DVD-Audio
DVD-V
DVD-RW
(VRVideo
format)
DVD-RW
(DVD
Recording forma t)
DVD-Audio
DVD-A
-RW(VR)
Logo
I nstrukcije
Visokokvalitetni
filmovi
Audio diskovi
≥
Svira se na
ovom uređaju u 2
kanala.
I ndi cated in
these
[DVD-V]
i nstruc tions by
I nstructions
High quality movie and music discs
Tip diska
Audio CD
CD
DV D-RW snimljeni na drugom DVD rekorderu §
≥
Formatiranjem mo ž
ete ponovno snimati disk na ovom ure đaju.
[DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›]
High fidelit y music
discs
Vi deo
CD on thisSV
CD
≥Played
unit
in 2 channels.
VCD
Logo
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder
≥
You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording”
CD
2if they have beenDVD-R
recorded t o a CPRM compatible
disc.
≥
By formattin g (➡ 61) the disc, you can record to it in DVDMP3
DivX
JPEG
MP3
DivX
JPEG
Video format and pl ay it on this unit.
≥
It may be necessary to f inalize the di sc on the equipment
used for recording.
––––
.
Disc type
I nstrukcije
DVD-R
Snimljeni audio i glazba
(uključujući CD -R/RW§ )
CD
Snimljeni audio i glazba
(uključujući CD-R/RW § )
CD-R/RW i DVD-R
(JPEG i TIFF)
Logo
V ideo CD
S VCD§2
1 sa MP3/DivX/Mirne slike
–
I ndi cated in
these
Div X, MP3, JP EG/TIFF
[CD]
DivX, MP3, JP EG/TI FF
[VCD]
i nstruc
tions
by
Opcije
o DVD-audiu
§1
§1 proizvođ
Neki multi-kanalni
DVD-audio
e spriječiti miješ
anje (stranica
68) music
sadržaja ako
je ovo
bila
namjera
ača. Pjesme
koje
su sprječ
avane
I nstructions
≥
DVD-R
withć
video
Recorded
audio and
≥
CD-R
and
CD-RW
Recorded
mus ic and
video
(including
za ovakvo mješanje
neće se
reproducirati valjano
na ovom
uređaju
je reproduciran
sain2 prednja
kanala
recorded
in DivX
§1 ) (npr. audio
with
video recorded
§1 ) samo).
(including
CD-R/RW
CD-R/RW
≥
DVD-R §1 with music
DivX
recorded in MP3
≥
CD-R and CD-RW §1
Diskovi≥DVD-R
koji §1ne
biti izvođeni
Tip diskova
withmogu
st ill pictures
with music
recorded inkoji se mogu reproducirati
recorded in JPEG and
MP3
TIFF 12 cm
≥
CD-R and CD-RW §1
≥2.6 i 5.2 GB DVD-RAM,
withkoristite
still pictures
Kada
diskove snimljene sa PAL ili NTSC, pogledajte
≥3.95 i 4.7 GB DVD-R autorizirani
recorded in JPEG and
tablicu.
≥Nefinalizirani DVD-R snimljeni na ostaloj opremi (➡page 51,
TIFF
Finali ze)
(Y: Moguć
e je vidjeti, t: Nije moguće vidjeti)
§1 Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some disc s due to t he condition of the recording.
≥DVD-Video sa regionalnim brojem drugačijim od“2” ili “ALL”
TV tip
Disk
Da/Ne
§2
Conforming to I EC62107.
≥
DVD-ROM
DVD-RW
≥
iR
iRW So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
≥
The
producer of ≥
the
disc can control
how discs are≥
played.
PAL
≥
CD-ROM
≥CDV
≥CD-G
Multi-sistem TV
ins
tructions. Read
t he disc’s instruct
ions carefully. ≥Photo CD
NTSC
≥
≥
Operatio
CVD n and sound
≥SVCD
quality of CDs
≥SACD
that do not conform
≥MV-Disc
to CD-DA specificat ions (copy control CDs, etc.)
cannot be guarant eed. 3
≥PD
≥Divx Video Disc.
PAL
×
NTSC TV
NTSC
4
Regarding DVD-Audio
Some mult i-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mix ing (➡ 81) of all or part of their content s if t his isPAL
the manufacturer’s intention. Tracks that
PAL oTV
are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audi
is pl ayed from the f ront t wo channels only). Refer t o the
NTSC
5 (PAL60)
disc’s jacket for mor e inf ormation.
Discs that cannot be played
≥
2.6 and 5. 2 G B DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥
3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Aut horing
≥
DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥
DVD-R (DVD-V ide o forma t), DVD-R DL, DV D-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on anothe r u nit and not fin alized (➡ 81).
≥
DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”
≥
Blu-ray
≥
DVD-RO M, +R (8 cm), CD-RO M, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SACD, MV-Disc, PD,
“Chaoji VCD” available on t he market including CVD, DVCD and
SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107, et c.
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
When you use t he disc s recorded eit her PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(Y: Possible t o view, t: Impossible t o view)
TV type
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
Yes/No
PAL
Y
NTSC
Y §1
PAL
t
NTSC
Y §2
PAL
Y
NTSC
Y §3 (PAL60)
Multi-system TV
NTS C TV
PAL TV
If you s elect “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 70), t he picture may be
clearer.
§2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 70).
§3
If your t elevision is not equipped t o handle PAL 525/60 signals
the pic ture will not be shown correctly.
≥
When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure t hat you
ma tch the “TV System” setting to the t it le (➡ 70).
§1
RQT841 5
6
Kartice
koje
seuse
mogu
Cards
you
can
onkoristiti
this unitna uređaju
Tip
Type
SD Memory
Memo ryCard
Card
SD
TM
§ §
miniS DTM
Card
miniSD
Card
Mu ltiMediaCard
MultiMedi
aCard
U priručniku:
Indicated
in these i nstructi ons
by
by
[SD]
[SD]
Podaci
biti snimljeni
Data
thatkoji
canmogu
be recorded
and
played
Mirn
e slike
Stil
l pictures
Vi deo (MPE G2)
Instrukcije
Instructions
Umetnite
direktno
u SD
You
can insert
direct
ly slot.
into the SD card slot.
§ A miniSD TM card adapt or included with the mini SD TM card is necessary.
≥You can play and copy st ill pict ures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 40, 56).
≥You can set the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) for automatic print ing on your home printer or at a
photo developin g store (➡ 49, 81).
≥MPEG2 moving pictures shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to t he HDD or
≥
Kompatibilno sa: FAT 12 ili FAT 16 DVD-RAM. (➡ 55)
≥MPEG2 moving pictures cannot be played directly from the SD card.
Moguće with:
SD Memory
≥Compatible
FAT 12 orkartice
FAT 16
≥Mož
ete
koristiti
kartice
sa
sl
j
edeć
im kapacitetom ( od 8 MB do 1 GB).
Suitable SD Memory Cards
≥You can
use SD Memory
h the
capacities (from 8 MB to 2 GB).
8 MB,
16 MB,Cards wit32
MB,following
64 MB,
128 MB,
256 MB,
512 MB,
1 GB (Maximum)
8 MB,
16 MB,
32 MB,
64 MB,
128 MB,
256 MB,
512 MB,
1 GB,
2 GB (Maxi mum)
≥Useable memory is slightly less than t he card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest informat ion on t he following website.
http://panasonic. co.jp/pavc/global /cs
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD Memory Card is format ted on ot her equipment, the time spent for recordin g may become longer. Also if the SD Memory Card is
formatt ed on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. I n these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 61, 81).
≥Thi s unit supports SD Memory Cards formatted in FAT 12 system and FAT 16 system based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥We recommend using a Pana sonic SD c ard.
Struktura mapa
Sljedeće
mogu biti prikazane na uređaju.
¢¢¢: Brojevi
XXX: Slova
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
DVD-RAM
The fol lowing
Card
can be displayed on t his unit.
¢¢¢: Numbers
DCIM (Higher fol der)
XXX: Let ters
Card
DV D-RAM
¢¢¢XXXXX (Pic ture fol der)
JPEG
DCIM¢¢¢ (Higher fo lder)
¢¢¢XXXXX (Picture fol der)
JPEG
XXXX ¢¢¢¢.JPG
(Higher
folder)
DCIM¢¢¢XXX
X¢¢¢¢.TIF
¢¢¢XXXXX (Pi cture fold er)
§
DCIM
¢¢¢XXXXX
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
DCIM
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
§
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
fol der)
DCIM (Highe r XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
¢¢¢XXXXX (Picture folder)
§
IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPORT
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPOR T
§
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
¢¢¢XXXXX
SD_VIDEO
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
PRG¢¢¢ (MPEG2 folder)
Mape mogu biti kreirane na drugim uređajima. Te mape ne mogu biti selektiranje za transferski postupak
(dubbing) .
MOV¢¢¢MOD
MOV¢¢¢MOI
≥Mapa ne može biti prikazana ako su svi brojevi“0” (npr., DCIM000 itd).
PRG¢¢¢PG I
≥Ako je ime mape kreirano na drugom uređ
aju,mož
e doć
i do pogreš
nog ispisa na ovom ure đ
aju.
§
MGR_INFO ( MPEG2 info rmation folder)
Folders can be creat ed on other equipment. However, these folders cann ot be s elected as a copying dest inat ion.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g., DCI M000, et c.).
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play
or edit the dat a.
§
RQT8415
7
Važne napomene za snimanje
When recording a
bi lingual programme
Snimanje
bilingualnog
programa
[ HDD]
RAM [RAM]
Both
main
and secondary
can
be recorded.
I glavni
i sporedni
audio moaudio
že biti
snimljen
You
can
change
the
audio
during
playback.
Možete odabrati audio tijekom snimanja.
(➡
36, Changing audio during play)
(stranica 22, “Changing audio during play”)
However in the following cases, select whether to
M 1main or
M2
record the
secondary audio:
Hello
Hallo
–Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 67, Audio Mode for
XP Recording)
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set t o “On” (➡ 26)
M2
M1
Hello opremom
Ako snimate sa vanjskom
Hallo
– Odaberite “M 1” i “M 2” na vanjskoj opremi.
Snimanje
Widescreen
programa
When recording 16:9
a spect (Widescreen)
programmes
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
[+RW]
-R
-R DL -[+R]
RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
Sel ect the main or secondar y audi o before
Odabir glavnog i sporednog audia prije
reco rding
snimanja
(➡ 67, Bilingual Audio Selection)
(stranica 40, “Bilingual Audio
Selection”)
M1
M1
Hello
Hello
The sel ected
audi o onl y is
recorded.
Ako
snimate
vanjskom
opremom
If you
recordsafrom
ext ernal
equipment
–Odaberite
“M1”
1”or
i “M
opremi.
–Select “M
“M2”2”na
onvanjskoj
the external
equipment .
RAM
-R
16:9 rezolucija (Widescreen)
-R DL
-RW(V) +R
+R DL +RW
Snimljeno u 4:3
I f you record from external equipment
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on t he external
equipment .
Nije moguće snimati na diskove koji imaju “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
[DVD-RW,
HDD] [RAM]+R, +R DL, +RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM. Koristite CPRM
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+RW]
(stranica
50) kompatibilne DVD-RAM.
Recorded
in
4:3
aspect
16:9
(Widescreen)
RAM aspect
(CPRM samo kompatibilni diskovi)
-R -R DL - RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Snimanje digitalnog
prijenosa
When you want to c opy
titl es in high speed
m ode from the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
S et “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 26).
You can copy title s in high spee d mode (max. spee d is 86X§); however, the following settings
are necessary
: Može, ×: Ne može
before recording t o the HDD.
§ -Depending
R -R DL -RW(V)
+R max.
+R DLspeed may vary.
on the disc,
Record to the HDD
Setup
Disk mora biti
Settings
finaliziran
for Recordingnakon premještanja datoteka(stranica 37)
Neophodno je
finalizirati
-R,
itd. na ovom ure đaju nakon snimke ili transfera titlova na njih. Mo žete zatim
Recording
time in EPDVD
mode EP
(8 Hours)
for High
Speed Copy
On
reproducirati Rec
kao
komercijalno
prodan
DVD -video. Međutim, diskovi postanu jedino reproducirani i vi ne
Tuning
Speediti
for High
Speed Co py Maximum
možete više DVD
biljež
ili prenositi
podatke na njih
HDD
Reprodukcija diskova
Na drugim DVD
playerima
When recording digital
broadcasts
Disc
Picture
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
Reprodukcija na drugoj DVD
opremi
Recorded to DVD-R, etc.
I t is not possible to record digital broadcasts t hat allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R,
+RW or 8 c m DVD-RAM discs. Use the Finalize
HDD or CPRM (➡ 81) compatible DVD-RAM.
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
-R DL +R DL
DVD-R DL i +R DL diskovi imaju dvije površine na jednoj strani diska.
Nije mogu će kontinuirano snimati sa jednog na drugi dloj. Snimanje završava kada se popuni jedan sloj.
[HDD]
Y
Morate zatvoriti prvi sloj da bi mogli snimati na drugi
(Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
(stranica 37, “Close First Layer”).
k
Snimanje na
DVD-R DL i
+R DL
Playing the disc on
other DVD players
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be t ransferred from the HDD to CPRM compat ible DVD-RAM (They
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
Nije
mogu će
Drugi sloj
≥Even when copying to videotape the
t it le may not be copied correctly because ofkontinuirano
the copy guard.
snimati
Dostupni
≥You cannot copy a playlist created f rom “One time only recording” title s.
sa jednog sloja na
prostor
drugi sloj.
Disk
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Disk
Prvi sloj
The disc must be fin aliz ed afte r recording or copying (➡ 62).
I t is nece ssary to finalize DVD-R, etc.Title1
on this unit after recording
or copying title s to them. You can t hen play
Title2
t hem as a commerciall y sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.§
Smjer snimanja
§You can record and copy agai n if you format DVD-RW.
Record to DVD-R, etc.
P lay on other DVD equi pment
Í /I
Í
DOUBLE RE
-M ASTER CD
Finalize
Recording to DVD-R DL
a nd +R DL
RQT841 5
8
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Recor d to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
S EQ UE NTIAL
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
∫
;
HDD (Hard disk drive) održavanje
-HDD je instrument visoke točnosti snimke
-zbog njegove sposobnosti dugog zadrž
avanja snimke i visoke brzine operacije je vrlo poseban uređ
aj koji je lako podlož
an prema š
teti.
Kao osnovno pravilo, napravite rezervne podatke na disku.
- HDD je uređaj koji nije otporan na vibracije/šok
Ovisno o postavkama okoline i rukovanju HDD neki sadrž
aji se mogu oš
tetiti. Posebno tijekom operacija, ne izlaž
ite uređaj prema bilo kojoj
vibraciji, š
oku, ili vađ
enju AC glavnih dijelova. U sluč
aju nestanka struje tijekom snimanja ili reprodukcije, sadr ž
aj mož
e biti uniš
ten.
- HDD je privremena memorija uređaja
HDD nije nepresuš
ivo skladiš
te za zabiljež
en sadrž
aj. Upotrijebljavajte HDD kao privremenu memorija za jednokratno gledanje, uređivanje, ili
č
uvanje zabiljež
enih sadrž
aja na disku.
- Odmah sač
uvajte (rezerva) sav sadrž
aj čim osjeć
ate da bi mogao biti problem s HDD
Ako postoji nepravilnosti unutar HDD, č
udni zvukovi ili problemi sa slikom (blokada buke, itd.) bi mogli rezultirati.
∫
Ne postavljajte izvore topline na ovaj
uređaj
Dekoder
Dekoder vrać
a kodirani signal sa DVD-a na
normalan zvuk.
Dolby Digital
Ovo je metoda kodiranja napravljena od Dolby
Laboratories. Odvaja stereo zvuk (2-kanala) od
ostalih kanala,velike količ
ine podataka se mogu č
uti
preko ove metode
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Ovaj zvuk se koristi u mnogim kinima,kazališ
tima i
ostalo.
Ne postavljajte,npr. ovaj uređaj na video,jer može doći do
blokade dotoka zraka.
This unit
VCR
Dynamic range
On predstavlja razmak između najviš
e frekvencije
koju mož
emo č
uti i izobličenja zvuka.
Film i video
DVD filmovi su obič
no snimljeni u tehnici 24 slič
ise
po sekund,dok su video filmovi snimljeni oko 30
sličica u sekundi.
∫
Kod premještanja uređaja
1 Ugasiteuređaj.
2 Izvadite AC kabel za napajanje.
3 Pomaknite uređaj samo kada je kompletno ugašen,i svi
diskovi iz njega izva đeni.
Mirna slika
Sličice predstavljaju zapravo sliku,slijed slika daje
film.One se prikazuju oko 30 po sekundi.
Do mirne slike dolazi kada pauzirate sliku,tada se
prikazuje samo jedna sličica koja je mirna..
∫
HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video dat a segments which
may cause difference s in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of t ime is insufficient, delet e any unwanted titles to create enough space before you st art recording. (Deleting a pl aylist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫
Kada se “HDD SLP (SLEEP)” pojavi na displayu
HDD je bio automatski postavljen u SLEEP mode. (HDD se nastavlja rotirati velikom brzinom dok je uređaj uključ
en. Da bi se produž
io ž
ivot
HDD, HDD ć
e biti stavljen u SLEEP nač
in ako nijedna operacija nije izvrš
ena za 30 minuta.)
≥Pritisnite [HDD] za aktivaciju.
≥Dok ste u SLEEP modeu reprodukcija mož
da neće početi trenutno jer HDD-u treba vremena za kativaciju.
∫
Upozorenja
Panasonic ne prihvać
a bilo koju odgovornost za odš
tete direktno ili indirektno zbog bilo kojeg tipa problema koji je rezultirao kao gubitak
snimke, i ne jamč
i bilo koji sadrž
aj ako snimanje ili uređivanje ne radi valjano. Takođ
er,primijena u sluč
ajevima gdje je bilo koji tip popravka
napravljen prema uređ
aju (uključ
ujuć
i bilo koji drugi ne-HDD dio).
RQT8415
9
Održavanje diska
∫
Kako držati disk
∫
Održavanje
Ne primajte stranu diska na kojoj su zapisani podaci
≥
Ne lijepite naljepnice na diskove
≥
Ne pišite po diskovima na strani gdje su zapisani podaci
≥
N ekoristite benzin ili ostale nadražujuće tvari za čišćenje.
≥
Ne koristite kemikalije za čišćenje.
≥
Ne odlažite na terminali nikakve vrste smeća.
≥
Ne koristite sljedeće diskove:
–Diskove sa nepravilno zalijepljenim naljepnicama
∫
Ako na disku ima prljavštine ili prašine
[RAM] [DVD-R]
≥
Očistite sa DVD-RAM/PD čistačem (LF-K200DCA1, gdje je
dostupno).
≥
Ne koristite tekućine za CD-e.
–Diskove koji su napukli.
–Nepravilne diskove.
≥
Ne odlažite diskove u:
–Direktno sunce.
–Prašnjava mjesta.
–Blizu plamenika
–Kod elektromagnetskih valova
Proizvođačne prihvać
a nijednu odgovornost i naknade za gubitak koje su nastale zbog problema s uređajem ili medijem, i
ne prihvać
a odgovornost za bilo koju sljedeć
uš
tetu uzrokovanu takvim gubitkom.
Primjeri uzroka takvih gubitaka su
-Disk koji je zabiljež
en s ovim uređajem je reproduciran u DVD Snimaču ili rač
unalu-od drugog proizvođača.
-Disk koji je upotrijebljen kao ranije opisan i tada se opet reproducirao u ovom uređaju.
-Disk je zabiljež
io s DVD Snimač
em ili rač
unalom koji je od drugog proizvođač
a.
Održavanje uređaja
Za održ
avanje,pobrišite sa suhom krpicom.
• Ne koristite alkohol ili druga nadražujuć
a sredstva.
• Ako koristite takva sredstva,prouč
ite uputstva
Koristite DVD-RAM/PD čistač(LF-K123LCA1, gdje je
dostupno) odprilike jednom godiš
nje,ovisno o uč
estalosti
upotrebe.
Pročitajte priruč
nik prije upotrebe
Ne postavljejte uređaj na
opremu koja može
postati vruća.
Vrućina može oštetiti uređaj.
[Savjet]
Ne postavljajte predmet na ventilatore uređaja.
Čistačleća: LF-K123LCA1 ili RP-CL720
RQT841 5
10
PRIJE PREMJEŠTANJA UREĐAJA;UVJERITE SE DA
SU SVI DISKOVI IZVAĐENI IZ UREĐAJA
Uključeni dodaci
Molimo da provjerite indentitet isporučenih dodataka.
∏
∏
∏
∏
∏
1 AC kabel za napajanje
2 RF koaksijalni kabel
2 Baterije
za upravljač
1 Audio/video
kabel
(EUR7659Y60)
1 Upravljač
≥Koristite samo za ovaj uređaj,ne
za ostale.
Informacije o daljinskom upravljaču
∫
Baterije
∫
Uporaba
≥Umetnite tako da polovi baterije (+ i -) odgovaraju onima na
daljinskom upravljaču.
Senzor upravljača
20
30
R6/LR6, AA
≥Ubacite tako da polovi (+ i -) odgovaraju onima na
upravljaču.
! Ne miješajte stare baterije sa novima,niti različite
tipove baterija.
! Koristite baterije bez opasnih sastojaka.
! Ne koristite baterije koje se mogu puniti.
! Izvadite baterije iz upravljača ako se on ne koristi
duže vrijeme.
! Ne izlažite baterije toplini,ili plamenu.Stare
baterije odmah zamijenite sa novima i to tipa
AA,UM3 ili R6
20
30
7 m ispred uređaja
Nepoštivanje savjeta o baterijama može prouzrokovati curenje
kemikalija i oš
tećenje daljinskog upravljača.
RQT8415
11
Vodičkroz kontrole
Daljinski upravljač
Instrukcije se obično uporabljaju za daljinski upravljač(u priručniku)
15
DVD
1
2
TV
Í
Í
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
VOLUM E
16
AV
PAGE
3
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
4
3
6
9
INPUT
SELECT
SKIP
CH
17
ShowVi ew
18
DELETE
19
20
SLOW/SEARCH
5
STOP
PAUSE
PL AY/x1.3
PROG/CHECK
6
7
I
8
21
22
23
ENTER
9
SUB MEN U
RETURN
S
CREAT E
CHAPTE R
10
11
12
13
14
MANUAL SKIIP
RE C
REC MODE EXT LIINK DIRECTTV REC
AUDIO
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
RQT841 5
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Upaliteuređ
aj (➡ 18)
Odaberite disk(HDD, DVD ili SD) (➡ 24, 34, 40)
Odaberite kanale, itd./Unos brojeva
Cancel
Osnovne operacije za reprodukciju
Prikaz infomracija o programima u GUIDE Plus+ sistemu
Odabir/Enter, Frame-by-f rame (➡ 36)
Prikaz glavnog menija/Direct Navigator (➡ 34, 35, 44)
Prikaz pod menija (➡ 44)
10 Gumbi u boji za mijenjanje Video/Pi ct ure i Video/ Playlists,
odabir tipa znaka , ručne opcije itd. (➡ 29, 34, 53, 63, 69)
11 Start recording (➡ 24)
12 Change recording mode (➡ 24)
13 Select audio (➡ 36)
14 Show status messages (➡ 43)
15 Prijenoskontrole za upravljač
16 OperacijeTV-a (➡ 23)
17 Odabir kanala/Promjena stranica u GUIDE Plus+ sistemu
(➡ 24, 29)
18 Show S HOW V IEW ekran (➡ 30)
19 Odabir ulaza (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 33, 58)
20 Brisanje (➡ 50)
21 Prikaz ekrana za vremensko snimanje (➡ 30)
22 Prikaz G UI DE Plus+ ekrana (➡ 19, 28)
23 Prikaz FUNCTIONS prozora (➡ 64)
24 Povratak na prijašnji ekran
25 Izrada poglavlja (➡ 36)
26 Preskakanje 30 sekunda u naprijed (➡ 36)
27 Direktno TV snimanje (➡ 59)
28 Vremensko snimanje sa vanjskom opremom (➡ 33)
29 Preskakanje vremena (➡ 36)
30 Prikaz menija na ekranu (➡ 42)
31 Funkcije snimanja
Glavni uređaj
1
3
2
4
5
OPEN/CLOSE
EXT L IN K
DRIVE
R EC
CH
k1 . 3
SVIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIOIN-R
DVIN
AV3
6
7 8
Otvaranje prednje ploče
Pritisnite prema dolje.
1 Standby/on switch (stranica 18)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
11
12 13
14
6 Odabir kanala (stranica 24,34)
7 Otvaranje/zatvaranje vrata diska (stranica 24,34,40 )
8 Prikaz (24,35)
9 Stop (stranica 34)
10 Početak reprodukcije (stranica 26)
11 Signalni senzor daljinskog upravljača
12 Počnite reprodukciju (stranica 14)/
Pritisnite za prebacivanje iz stand by modea u normalni mode.
Disc tray (stranica 22, 30)
SD card utor (stranica 6)
Svijetli kada je HDD, DVD ili SD drive odabran
Display (stranica dolje)
Konekcija kamkordera. (stranica 47)
Vremenska snimanja sa vanjskom opremom (stranica 29)
Odabir kanala (stranica 22)
Specificirajte vrijeme za početak (stranica 15)
Umetanje,vađenje SD kartice
Umećite ili uklanjajte SD karticu nakon isključ
enja uređaja.
Kada kartič
ni indikator (“SD”) na prikazu uređaja bljesne, kartica je proč
itana . Ne isključ
ujte uređaj ili uklanjajte karticu. Takva
akcija može rezultirati pogrešno funkcioniranje ili gubitak sadrž
aja kartice.
Otvaranje zaštite
Pritisnite dolje.
Umetanje kartice
Vađenje kartice
Pritisnite na centar
kartice dok se ne čuje
klik.
Ako upotrijebljavate
miniSDTM karticu,
umetnite je u
miniSDTM adapter
koji dolazi s karticom.
Umetnite i uklonite
ovaj adapter iz
uređaja.
Zatvaranje
1 Pritisnite centar
kartice.
Pritisnite
2 Izvadite je ravno.
ADAPTER
Umetnite karticu prema gore
(Ne zaoravite zatvoriti poklopac. desno)
≥Možete koristiti SD Memorijske kartice kapacitetom 8 MB do 1 GB (11).
Zaslon uređaja
1
2
REC
PLAY
6
3
4
5
8
7
1 Vremensko snimanje sa vanjskom opremom
2
Snimanje
Reprodukcija
Snim anje/Repro.
REC
REC
PLAY
3 Indikator remenskog snimanja
4 Svijetli kada je SD kartica umetnuta u slot.
5 Svijetli kada je disk umetnut u svoj otvor.
PLAY
6 Svjetli kada je HDD, DVD ili SD disk odabran
7 Glavni zaslon
8 Mode snimanja
RQT8415
13
KORAK 1 Spajanje
Koristite isporučene RF koaksijalne kablove
Koristite par isporučenih RF koaksijalnih kablova,samo kada spajate RF IN i RF OUT terminale. Pomicanje kablova može privremeno pokvariti
sliku na vašem TV-u.
Korištenje 21-pinskog Scart kabla
• Mož
etekoristiti Q Link funkcije spajanjem Q Link kompatibilnog televizora (stranica 59).
• Mož
ete už
ivati u visokokvalitetnoj slici spajanjem na RGB kompatibilni televizor (stranica 81). Potrebne opcije “AV1 Output” u meniju
podešavanja (stranica 68)
• Prije spajanja, ugasite uređaj i pročitajte tehnički priručnik.
Spajanje televizije
A
Aer ial
kabel
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RF
koaksijalni
kabel
(uključeno)
1
Na glavno napajanje
(AC 220–240 V, 50 Hz)
AV IN
RF
koaksijalni
kabel
(uključeno)
2
RF
OUT
Spajanje terminala drugog od
21-pinskog Scart-a
(➡ 16)
3
AC glavni kabel
Spojite nakon što su sve
konekcije gotove
21-pinski
Scart kabel
Ventilator
4
RF
IN
AV1 (TV )
Y
PB
PR
OPTICA L
COMPONENT VIIDEO OUT
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
R- AUDII O -L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM))
Stražnja strana uređaja
B
Spajanje TV-a i videa
Stražnja strana TV-a
Antena
VHF/UHF
RF IN
4
Na glavno napajanje
(AC 220–240 V, 50 Hz)
AV IN
Spajanje terminala drugog od
21-pinskog Scart-a
(➡ 16)
RF koaksijalni
kabel
(uključeno)
RF
OUT
AC glavni kabel
Spojite nakon što su sve
konekcije gotove
.
5
21-pinski
Scart kabel
Ventilator
6
RF
IN
AV1 (TV )
Y
PB
PR
OPTICA L
COMPONENT VIIDEO OUT
R-AUD I O-L
AV2 (DECODER /EXT )
VIDEO
SVIDEO
AC IN
DIGITA L AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM))
Straž
nja strana ure đaja
RF koaksijalni
kabel
(included)
2
∫
Spajanje uređaja direktno na TV
3
1
21-pinski
Scart kabel
Antena
Ako spojite uređaj direktno na AV ili video rekorder na TV, video
signal ć
e biti izmjenjen zbog prava vlasnika
Televizija
Televizija
AV OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RF OUT
Stražnja strana uređaja
RQT841 5
14
“AV2 Input ” i “AV2 Connection” opcije u meniju
podešavanja (➡ 68)
Ovaj uređaj
VCR
VCR
Ovaj uređaj
C
Spajanje TV-a i digitalnog/satelitskog recievera ili dekodera
Antena
Antena
Stražnja strana TV-a
VHF/UHF
RF IN
1
RF
koaksijalni
kabel
(uključeno)
Na glavno napajanje
(AC 220–240 V, 50 Hz)
AV IN
Spajanje terminala drugog od
21-pinskog Scart-a
(➡ 16)
RF
koaksijalni
kabel
(uključeno)
2
RF
OUT
3
AC glavni kabel
Spojite nakon što su sve
konekcije gotove
21-pi nski
Scart kabel
5
Ventilator
RF
IN
AV1 (TV )
Y
PB
PR
OPTICA L
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
R-AUD I O -L
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AC IN
DIGITA L AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM))
Stražnja strana uređaja
Gledajuć
i video sa dekodera na televiziji dok je uređaj
zaustavljen ili dok snima.
Ako ste spojili televiziju na AV1 terminal i dekoder na
AV2 terminal na ovom uređaju, pritisnite (^ 0 ^)i
[ENTER]. (“DVD” se pojavi na prikazu uređaja.)
Pritisnite opet za poniš
tavanje. (“TV” se pojavi na
prikazu uređaja.)
?Ako je televizija kompatibilna s RGB unosom, RGB
izlazni signal od dekodera mož
e takođ
er biti izlaz od
glavnog uređaja na isti nač
in.
4
21-pinski
Scart kabel
AV OUT
Stražnja strana
dekodera ili recievera
Spajanje TV-a Videa, digitalnog/satelitskog receivera ili decodera
D
Straž
nja strana TV-a
Antena
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV IN
RF koaksijalan
kabel
(uključeno)
5
RF
OUT
Spajanje terminala drugog od
21-pinskog Scart-a
(➡ 16)
6
Na glavno napajanje
(AC 220–240 V, 50 Hz)
AC glavni kabel
Spojite nakon š
to su sve
konekcije gotove
.
Ventilator
21-pinski
Scart kabel
7
RF
IN
AV1 (TV )
Y
PB
PR
OPTICA L
COMPONENT VIIDEOOUT
1
RF koaksijalan
kabel
(uključeno)
R- AUDII O -L
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM))
Stražnja strana
uređaja
21-pinski
Scart kabel
2
4
3
Antena
AV OUT
Stražnja
strana-Video
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RF OUT
AV IN
AV OUT
Di gi talni/sateli tski receiver
ili decoder-stražnja strana
RQT8415
15
KORAK 1 Konekcije
Ostale konekcije
Spajanje TV-a sa S VIDEO terminalima
Spajanje TV-a sa AUDIO/VIDEO
terminalima
S VIDEO O UT t erminal postiže puno čišću sliku nego
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Rezultati ovise i o modelu televizije.)
Straž
nja strana TV-a
Stražnja strana TV-a
AUDIO I N VIDEO
R
L
IN
Crveno
S VIDEO
IN
AUDIO IN VIDEO
R
L
IN
Bijelo Žuto
Crveno
Audio/Video kabel
(uključeno)
S VIDEO
IN
Bijelo
S Vi deo
kabel
Audio/Vi deo kabel
(uključeno)
Crveno Bijelo Žuto
Crveno
Bijelo
OPTICA L
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
R-AUDIO -L
DIGIITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
Stražnja strana uređaja
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGIITA L AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
Stražnja strana uređaja
Spajanje televizije sa COMPONENT VIDEO terminalima
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal
Straž
nja strana TV-a
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y
PB
Ovi terminali pružaju jasniju I prirodniju sliku od S-VIDEO OUT
terminala
≥
Spajajte terminale iste boje.
AUDIO IN
R
L
PR
Crveno
Video kabel
RF
OUT
Ovi terminali se koriste za postizanje bolje slike od S-VIDEO OUT terminala.
Spajanje pomoć
u ovih terminala se odvajaju signali (P B/P R) i signal
luminiscencije (Y) za prikaz realističnijih boja. Opis ovih signala ovisi o
samom televizoru ili monitoru (npr. Y/PB /PR,Y/B-Y/R-Y, Y/CB /CR).
Bijelo
Audio/V ideo
kabel
(uključeno)
CRT
Crveno Bijelo
RF
IN
AV1 (TV )
Y
PB
PR
OPT
COMPONENTVIIDEO OUT
AV2 (DECODER/EXT)
R -AUD IO-L
Stražnja strana uređaja
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGII
(PC
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Progresivni izlaz
Ovaj uređaj
Za progresivan ulaz (➡ 22)
RQT841 5
16
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Spajanje pojačala ili sistemske komponente
■Už
ivanje u multikanalnom zvuku sa vaš
eg
DVD-Vid ea
Spajanje pojačala sa Dolby Digital, DTS i MPEG dekodera koristeći
digitalni audio kabel-promijenite opciju
“Digit al Audio Output” (stranica 40) nakon što je traženje gotovo
≥
Nemožete koristitiDTS Digital Surround dekodere na DVD.
≥I kod korištenja ovog spajanja,koristit će se samo 2 kanala za
DVD-Audio.
∫
Spajanje stereo pojačala
Stražnja strana pojačala
AUDIO IN
R L
Stražnja strana pojačala
Crveno Bijelo
OPTICAL IN
Optički digitalni
audio kabel
Ne vucite kabel.
Audio kabel
Umetnite kako je
prikazano na slici
Crveno
Bijelo
OPTICA L
OPTICA L
DIGITA L AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM))
R -AUDIIO-L
Stra žnja strana uređaja
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM))
Stra žnja strana uređaja
Kada ne koristite uređaj duž
e vrijeme
Zač
uvanjeenergije, odspojite uređaj iz napajanja. Ovaj uređaj koristi
energiju čak i kada je isključen
[oko. 2 W (Power Save mode)]
Kada je “Power Save” podešeno na “O n”, “Quick Start” funkcija ne
radi.
RQT8415
17
KORAK 2 Opcije prijema kanala TV opcije
≥
Ako se pojavi prozor odabira zemlje na TV-u.
npr. , [DMR-EH55]
Country
DVD
DVD
België
Belgique
Belgien
Danmark
España
TV
Í
Í
Sc hweiz
Suisse
Svizzera
France
Italia
Nederland
SELECT
V OLUME
CH
DR I VE
SELECT
Deutschland
Österreich
Po rtugal
Suomi
Sverig e
AV
ENTER
Others
Norg e
RETURN
PAGE
1
4
7
Brojčani
gumbi
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
CH
DELETE
PLAY/x 1.3
Af ter set up je gotovo, opcije TV rezolucije se pojavljuju.
PROG/CHECK
I
ENTER: access
Switzerland, “Power Save” meni se pojavljuje. Odaberite
“On” ili “Off” (➡ 68).
Auto-Setup počinje. Ovo traje oko 8 minuta.
SL OW /SEARCH
PAUSE
RETURN: leave
Pritisnite [▼▲◄►] za odabir zemlje,pritisnite [ENTER].
Ako odaberete “Schweiz ”, “Suisse” ili “Svizzera” u meniju
zemlje,ili ako su opcije TV-a postavljene na
ShowViiew
INPUT
SELECT
SKI P
ST OP
CH
GUIDE
TV Aspect
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
ENTE R
4:3 TV
ENTER
4:3
SU B MENU
RETURN
CREAT E
CHAPTE R
SUB MENU
Letterb ox
RETURN
S
SELECT
MANU AL SKII P
ENTER
RE C
AUD I O
REC MODE
RETURN
EXT LINK DIIRECT TV REC
S TATUS DISPL AY TIIMESL IP
≥16:9: 16:9 widescreen t elevizija
≥4:3: 4: 3 televizija
[HDD] [RAM] Pohranjuju se postaje kako su prikazane.
[DVD-V] Video recorded za š
iroki ekran se prikazuje Pan
& Scan (osim ako nije zabranjeno od proizvođača
diska) (➡ 81).
≥Letterbox:4:3 televizija
3 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir TV
rezolucije i pritisnite [ENTER].
Kada je podeš
en tip TV-a, pojavljuje se G UI DE Plus+
1
2
UpaliteTVset,teodreditetoč
an AV ulaz
Pritisnite [ DVD]za paljenje uređaja.
ekran.
Auto-Setup
Do y ou want to setup
the GUIDE Plus+ system ?
Prikazuje se meni zemlje.
Yes
No
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
Download from TV
Pos
4
Do wnload in pr ogress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
≥
Ako ž
elite podesiti GUIDE Plus+ sistem
Press [ ◄►] te odaberite “Yes” i pritisnite [ENTE R].
Krenite na korak 2 (➡ 19, GUIDE Plus+)
RETURN
Možete skinuti poziciju programa sa TV-a.
Za stopiranje
Pritisnite [RETURN].
■Ako se pojavi prozor sa satom za namještanje
Podesite sat ručno
■Zapotvrdudasu stanicepronađeneispravno
■Zaponavljanjedownloada
RQT841 5
18
GUIDE Plus+ opcije sistema
O GUIDE Plus+ sistemu
GUIDE Plus+ sistem
GUIDE Plus+ sistem pruž
a programske informacije od domać
e
postaje pokazane na televizijskom TV č
asopisu.
3
Pojavit će se jedan od sljedećih ekrana
Potvrdite poruku na ekranu.
12.1. Wed 15:05
Landscape
12.1Wed
Prog.Type
AllTypes
7th Heaven
15:05~16:05
GUIDE Plus+ sistem je raspolož
iv u sljedeć
im zemljama:
Austrija/Belgija/Francuska/Njemač
ka/Nizozemska/Španjolska/Š
vicarska
(od 28 Veljač
e 2005)
?Ovaj servis nije raspolož
iv u nekim područ
jima u gornjim
zemljama.
Time:
15:00
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR
Ta... Abenteuer...
≥Posjetite sljedeću stranicu za više podataka.
http://www.europe.guideplus.com
16:00
16:30
Flieg e-Die Talksho w
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Al exande r...
... 7th Heaven
Gilmore...
No Data
Abenteuerurlaub
-24 Hr
[Savjet]
Vi ć
ete trebati završ
iti Poč
etni Set Downloadiranja ( desno) ili
Automatskog downloadiranja- 19) prema postavi VODIČPlus+
sistemu.
?VODIČPlus+ sistemska postava neć
e raditi ako sat nije
stavljen toč
no.
15:30
TIMERREC
RETURN
Prog. Type
info
GUIDE
...
Aktuell
+24 Hr
S SUB MENU PAGE DisplayMode
PAGE +
Ako se “No
Data”
pojavi (➡ 20,
Editing
programme
lists,
Reference)
GUIDE Plus+ download je završeno.
12.1. Wed 15:05
Setup
No Host Channel was detected.
Please refer to Operating Instructions.
Press ENTER to conti nue.
ENTER
RETURN
1
Pritisnite [GUIDE].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Postal Code
GUIDE Plus+ sis tem nije dostupan.
Provjerite kanale vaše zemlje.
(➡ 21, Host Channel)
12.1. Wed 15:05
Current Country: Germany
Data do wnload was unsuccessful.
Next do wnload time slot will be at XX:XX.
This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data several times a
day.
Clicking noise may hear at thattim e.
ENTER
0
~
Press ENTER to continue.
ENTER
9
RETURN
RETURN
2 Pritisnite [▼▲] ili brojčane
gumbe za unos poštanskog
broja i pritisnite [ENTER].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Setup
Yes
Setup
Zaskidanje GUIDE Plus+ podataka, ugasite uređaj u vrijeme
prikazanom na ekranu ili skinite podatke posebno
“Data Download” u meniju podeš
avanja.
(➡ 21, Changing t he set tings )
Stopiranje
Pritisnite [ RETURN].
No
Do you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system?
It maytake time up to 2 hours.
ENTER
RETURN
Mož
e trajati do 2 sata za podešavanje G UI DE Plus+ sistema.
≥
Ako želite podesiti GUIDE Plus+ sistem
P ritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Yes” i pritisnite [ENTE R].
≥
Ako ne želite podesiti GUIDE Plus+ sistem
P ritisnite [◄►] odaberite “No” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Zakasnijeskidanjepodatakao GUIDE Plus+
(➡ 20, G UI DE Plus+ data download)
RQT8415
19
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
Pogledajte kontrole na stranici 18.
Editiranje programske liste
GUIDE Plus+ podaci
1
2
GUIDE Plus+ podaci se prenose preko host kanala
potrebno je oko 2 sata da se podaci skinu.
Pritisnite [GUIDE].
Pritisnite [SUB MENU].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Landscape
12.1 W ed
Prog. Type
AllTypes
16:05~17:05
Time:
NET
16:30
... Derri ck Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgeric ht
Richterin Barbara Sa... RichterAlexander...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade
...
7th Heaven
Yu-...
Gilmore...
Die Abschl... Freunde...
Setup S.O.S Style & ...
RETURN
DVD - AVCD
D.MIX
16:00
ENTER
3
CH DC BS DUB EXTLin k MPEG4
15:30
Ta... Abenteuer... Fliege-Die Talkshow
Editor
≥GUIDE Plus+ podaci se skidaju kada je uređaj isklju čen.
Tijekom skidanja, “GUIDE” se pojavljuje na ekranu
HDD REC PLAY
SD
PC
15:00
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7
Download podataka automatski
Gilmore girls
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Editor” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
SP -+ RWRAM
LP V R
EP SDPC
12.1. Wed 15:05
Editor
Name
WDR
***04
***05
Euros
ARD
ZDF
BBC1
***06
On/Off
R eference
Source
On
On
TF1
TF6
Tuner
On
FR6
On
On
On
On
On
ESPRT
ARD
----
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
BBC1
ARTE
ENTER
PAGE +
RETURN
4
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir željenog
imena “Name” i pritisnite [►].
Možete pritisnuti [ CH] za pretraživanje kanala.
On/Off
Odabir postaja koje se porikazuju na lsiti.
Samo postaje koje su postavljene na “On” su
prikazane u G UI DE Plus+ listi.
Reference
Pritisnite [ ▼▲] za promjenu “On/Off” opcija i
pritisnite [ ENTER].
Ako se pojavljuje „no data“ na ekranu,to znači da se podaci
koji su potrebni za GUIDE listu ne prenose.
Konkretno to je slučaj i za Hrvatsku.
12.1. Wed 15:05
Landscape
12.1Wed
Prog.Type
AllTypes
15:05~16:05
Time:
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR
7th Heaven
15:00
Abenteuerurlaub
16:30
RETURN
Aktuell
+24 Hr
GUIDE
...
Pr og.Type
S
TIMER REC
20
16:00
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
... 7th Heaven
Gilmore ...
No Data
-24 Hr
RQT841 5
15:30
Ta... Abenteue r... Fliege-Die Talkshow
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht Das Jugendgericht
SUB MENU PAGE -
DisplayMode
PAGE+
Host Kanal
Promjena opcija
Mož
ete promijeniti vaš
e opcije u GUIDE Plus+ listi.
1
2
Pritisnite [GUIDE].
Pritisnite [SUB MENU].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Landscape
12.1 Wed
Pr og.Type
All Types
Gilmore girls
16:05~17:05
Time:
15:00
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PR O7
15:30
16:00
Nije mogu će primati GUIDE Plus+ podatke u svim zemljama
(➡ dolje).
Lis ta kanala
Zemlja
Kanal
Prikaz host kanala
16:30
Ta... Abenteuer ... Fliege-DieTalkshow
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca -Wege...
Germany
Eurosport
EUROS
Austria
Eurosport
EUROS
Switzerland§1
Eurosport
EUROS
France
Canal+ §2
CANAL
Spain
Tele5
TELE5
Italy
Sport It alia
SI
Netherlands§3
Eurosport/Music
Fact ory (TMF)
EUROS / TMF
Belgium§4
RTL-TVI/
Music Factory
(TMF)
RTLTV/ TMF
Luxembourg §5
RTL-TVI
RTLTV
Das Familien geri cht Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Ale xande r...
Detektiv
...
Duel M... B eyblade
7th Heaven
Yu-...
Gilmor e...
Die Absc hl... Freunde...
Setup S.O.S Style & ...
Editor
ENTER
RETURN
3
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Setup” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Setup
Postal Code
XXXXX
Host Channel
EUR OS
Data D ownload
Night Do wnload
On
ENTER
RETURN
4
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir i
pritisnite [ENTER].
RQT8415
21
Podešavanje Vašeg daljinskog upravljača
4
DVD
TV
Í
Í
CH
DRIV E
SELEC T
VOLUM E
TV
operacijski
gumbi
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir
“Connection” i pritisnite [►].
Setup
AV
Tuning
PAGE
1
4
7
Broj čani
gumbi
2 3
5 6
8 9
0
ShowV i ew
5
SLOW/SEARCH
STO P
PAUS E
SELECT
ENTER
PLAY/x 1.3
Setup
PR OG// CH ECK
ENTE R
FUNCTIONS
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
RETURN
Connection
Others
RETUR N
S
CRE ATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
Progressive
On
Off
Tuning
SUB MEN U
TA B
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir
I pritisnite [ENTER].
I
▼▲►◄
ENTER
4:3
Off
PAL
Video
Others
DELET E
INPUT
SELECT
SKI P
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
CH
TV Aspect
P rogressive
TV System
AV1 Output
AV2 Settnigs
MANU AL SKII P
REC
REC MOD E EX T LIIN K DIRECT TV REC
AUDIIO
STATU S DISPLAY TIME SL IP
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
6
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “On” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Izlaz postaje progresivan.
[Savjet]
Už
ivanje u progresivnom videu
Mož
ete uživati u progresivnom videu tako da uključite opremu u
COMPONENT VIDEO O UT t erminale na LCD/plasma televiziji ili
LCD projektoru sa progresivnim scanom (➡ 81).
1
Dok je uređaj stopiran
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remai n 70:00 SP
Pl ayback
Reco rding
Delete
Cop y
To Othe rs
ENTER
RETURN
2
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “To
Others”i pritisnite [ENTER].
3
and
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Setup”
Setup
Manual
Auto -Setup Restart
Tuning
Download fromTV
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
RQT841 5
22
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
≥
Kod spajanja na regularni televizor (CRT: Cathode ray tube) ili
multisistemski TV koristeći PAL mode, č
ak i ako je progresivno
kompatibilan može doći do nekih smetnji. Isključ
ite
“Progressive” ako se to pojavi (➡ 43).
≥
Slika neće biti točno prikazana ako se spaja sa
nekompatibilnim televizorom.
≥
Nema izlaza sa COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminala ako je
“AV1 Out put” u meniju podešavanja pode šen na “RGB 1
(bez komponente )” ili “RG B 2 (bez komponente)”.
Povratak na prijaš
nji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta.
TV operacije
Ako ostali Panasonicovi
proizvodi reagiraju na upravljač
Mož
eteprogramir a ti TV operacijski gumb za paljenje/gašenje TV-a,
promjenite ulazni mode TV-a, odabir TV kanala,ili glasnoće.
DVD
Í
Upalite ili ugasite TV
DRIVE
SELECT
1PodDok
je stopiran
normalnim
okolnostima birajte kod “DVD 1”.
Glasnoć
a
Í
CH
1
V OLUM E
AV
Odabir ulaza
PAGE
1
4
2
5
3
6
Odabir
kanala
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
2 Pritisnite [] za odabir
CH
“SETUP” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Usmjerite upravljačna TV
3 Pritisnite [,] za odabir “Others”
i pritisnite [].
Kod pritiska [TV], unesite kod sa
brojčanim gumbima.
npr.,
Ako je drugi Panasonicov proizvod blizu ovog,
promjenite kod na uređaju i upravlja ču (moraju
odgovarati).
01:
[0] ➡ [1]
4 Pritisnite [,] za odabir “Remote
Proizvođači kod.
Control” pritisnite [ENTER].
Panasonic
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
JVC
LOEWE
METZ
01/02/03/04/
45
35
27/30
09
10/15
05/06
31
05/31/33
05/06
31
10
31
05/06/ 31
09
22/23/ 31/ 40/
41/42
34
30
25
17/39
07/46
28/31
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
06/19/ 20
24
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
NEC
36
WHI TE
05/ 06
WESTINGHOUSE
AI WA
AKAI
BLAUPUNKT
BRANDT
BUSH
CURTIS
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
FERGUSO N
GOLDSTAR/LG
GOODMANS
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
NO KIA
25/26/27
NORDMENDE
ORION
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PI ONEER
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SBR
SCHNEIDER
10
37
05/06
31/33
38
05/06
05/06
10
26
31/32/43
05/31/33
21
06
05/06/29/
30/31
06/25
18
09
05/06/33
08
10/11/12/
13/14
10/15/44
16
SELECO
SHARP
SI EMENS
SI NUDYNE
SO NY
TELEFUNKEN
5 Pritisnite [] za odabir koda
(“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” ili “DVD 3”) Others”
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Remote Control
Pritisnite “ ±” and “ENTER” together
for more than 2seconds on theremote
control.
re
6
Promjena koda na daljinskom upravljač
u
Kod pritiska [ENTER], pritisnite i
držite brojčane gumbe ([1], [2] ili
[3]) na duže od 2 sekunde.
7
Pritisnite [ENTER].
∫
Kod prikaza indikatora na uređaju:
Kod daljinskog upravljača
Promjenite kod upravljaču da odgovara onom na uređaju
(➡ korak6).
2
Testirajte paljenjem TV-a i promjenom
kanala
≥
Ponovite proceduru dok ne pronađete kod koji odgovara
Vašim operacijama.
≥
Ako Vaše ime tvrtke TV-a kojeg posjedujete nije prikazano
u ovoj tablici,znači da ne možete upravljati sa tim uređajem.
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 7).
[Savjet]
Izvršenjem»shipping Condit ion” u SETUP meniju vas
vraća na izvorni kod “DVD 1”. Promijenite upravljač(kod)
na 1
(➡ korak 6).
RQT8415
23
Snimanje TV programa
2
5
3
Pritisnite [CH] za odabir kanala.
RRREEECC
OPEN/CLOSE
EXT L IN K
SVIDEO IN VID EOIN
DV IN
1
Í
CH
3
6
9
CH
CH
Pritisnite [REC MODE] za odabir
Modea snimanja (XP, SP, LP ili EP).
REC
ShowVii ew
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
■
4
PAGE
2
5
8
0
Zaodabir sa brojčanim gumbima:
e.g. ,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
V OLUM E
AV
1
4
7
Brojčani
gumbi
k1 .3
∫
3 1
TV
Í
CH
L /MON O- AUDI OI N-R
A V3
DV D
DRII VE
SELEC T
REC
DR
I VE
DELETE
Preostalo
vrijeme
SLO W/SEARCH
Pauza
STOP
PAUS E
PLA Y/x1.3
PROG//CHECK
5
▼▲►◄
ENTER
ENTER
SU B MENU
REC
RETURN
S
CRE AT E
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIIP
RE C
REC MOD E EXT LIINK DIRECT TV REC
AUD I O
STATU S DISPLAY TIIME SLII P
4
REC
AUDIO
Priprema
≥
Upalite televizor i odaberite ulazni signal koji ž
elite snimati.
≥
Upaliteovajuređaj.
1
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir
HDD ili DVD drive.
HDD ili DVD indikator svijetli na uređaju.
2
Ako odaberete DVD drive
Pritisnite [ OPEN/CLOSE] za otvaranje
uređaja,te umetnite disk u njega.
≥Pritisnite gumb ponovno za zatvaranje vrata.
≥Kod uporabe 8 cm DVD-RAM, ili 8 cm DVD-R, izvadite disk
iz catradgea .
Umetnite ovim smjerom . ∫
Cartridge disk
Umetnite kako je
na slici.
Umetnite do kraja.
RQT841 5
24
Pritisnite [REC] za početak snimanja.
Modeovi snimanja i vremena snimanja
Ovisno o snimci,vrijeme snimanja može biti i kraće.
DV D-RAM
Recordi ng Mode
X P (Visoka kval.)
§
HDD
(160 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
DV D-R
DV D-RW
+R
+RW
(4.7 GB)
Doublesi ded §1
(9.4 GB)
DV D-R DL §3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL §3
(8.5 GB)
36 sati
1sat
2 sati
1 sat
1 sat 45 min.
1 sat 45 min.
SP (Standard
recording mode)
70 sati
2 sati
4 sati
2 sati
3 sati 35 min .
3 sati 35 min.
LP (Long recording
mode)
138 sati
4 sati
8 sati
4 sati
7 sati 10 min .
7 sati 10 min.
E P (Extra long
play)§ 4
284 sati
(212sati §2)
8 sati
(6 sati§2)
16 sati
(12 sati§2 )
8 sati
(6 sati§2 )
14 sati 20 min.
(10 sati 45 min.§2 )
FR (Automatski
odabir) §4
284 sati
maximum
8 sati
maximum
8 sati
maximum for
one side
8 sati
maximum
14 sati 20 min.
Aproksimativno 9
sati sa video
kvalitetom
ekvivalentno LP
Kod “Recording time in EP mode” je podešeno na “EP (6Sati)” u SETUP meniju.
Kvaliteta zvuka je bolja u “EP (6Sat)” nego u “EP (8Sat)”.
[Savjet]
Kod snimanja na DVD-RAM koristeći “EP (8Sat)” mode, reprodukcija možda neć
e biti moguće na DVD players koji su kompatibilni sa DVD-RAM.
U ovim slučajevima “EP (6Sat)” mode treba biti odabran.
FR (Fl exible Recording Mode)
Uređaj automatski odabire mode snimanja XP i EP(8Sat) da omogući najbolju sliku na disku
≥Možete podesiti vremensko snimanje.
≥Svi modovi snimanja XP do EP se pojavljuju na displayu
RRREECCC
Umetanje/vađenje diska
Kada se prikazuje potvrdni ekran
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW ]
Kada umetnete disk koji je napravljen na računalu,ili nekom
drugom uređaju može se pojaviti ekran:
Kod vađenja diska
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Kada pritisnite [OPEN/CLOSE] na glavnom uređaju dok je stopiran:
Sljede ć
i ekran se pojavljuje:
Finalize
Format
This disc is not formatted proper ly.
Format it using DVD Management?
Ye s
No
SELECT
ENTER
Finalize the disc so that is can be played
on other DVD players.
Savjet: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalizing. This may take up to
min.
Pritisnite the OPEN/CLOSE button to
exit.
The disc cannot be pla yed on other
DVD play ers without finalizing.
RETURN
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Yes” i pritisnite [ENTER].
• Nekoliko koraka je potrebno za formatiranje diska.
Pogledajte “Deleting all the contents of a disc –Format
Disc” (stranica 61).
)
RQT8415
25
Snimanje TV programa
OPEN/ C
L OSE
Opcije snimanja za High Speed
kopiranje
REC
DRIVE
k1 . 3
∫REC
DRIVE
1
SELECT
DV D
TV
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
Brojčani
gumbi
Í
CH
DRII VE
SELECT
PAG E
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ST OP
CH
ShowViiew
DELET E
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
STOP
VOLUM E
AV
SL OW/SEARC H
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
Pogledajte “I mportant savjets f or recording” za više informacija
(➡ 8).
►
PROG /CHECK
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
2
RETURN
3
RETURN
S
CREAT E
CHAPTER
REC
AUDII O
1
FUNCTIONS
ENTE R
SUB MEN U
▼▲,2,
Kod kopiranja u high speedu na DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DV D-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL i +RW nakon što ste
snimili na HDD
Ako kopiranje koristi veliku brzinu na DVD-R, itd., podesite
“Rec for High Speed Copy” na “On” prije sninanja na HDD.
Sljedeće restrikcije dolaze na:
≥
Kod snimanja bilingularnog programa, ili glavni ili
sekundarni audio se može snimati.
–Ako ne spajate vanjsku opremu
Odaberite “M 1” ili “M 2” u “Bilingual Audio Selection” u setup
meniju (➡ 67).
–Ako spojite vanjsku opremu
Odaberite “M 1” ili “M 2” na vanjskoj opremi.
≥
Čak i ako je 16:9 rezolucija (Widescreen) odabrana,snima se u
4:3 rezoluciji.
REC MODE
MANUA L SKIIP
EXT LIIN K DIIRECT TV REC
4
5
STA TUS DISPLAY TIME SLII P
STATUS
Dok je uređaj stopiran
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “To Others”
i pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Setup”
i pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Disc”
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Settings for
Recording” i pritisnite [ENTER].
6
Određivanje vremena za prestanak snimanja—One
Touch Recording
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Rec for
High Speed Copy” i pritisnite [ENTER].
7 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “On” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Tijekom snimanja
Pritisnite [ REC] na glavnom uređaju za odabir
vremena.
8
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Yes” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Svaki put kada pritisnete gumb:
30 (min.) ""# 60 (min.)
^"
Counter (cancel)
""#
90 (min.)
""# 120 (min.)
,"" 240 (min.) ,"" 180 (min.) ,}
≥
Funkcija ne radi tijekom snimanja (➡stranica 28) ili dok
koristite Flexible Recording (➡ stranica 27).
Prestanak snimanja
Pritisnite [].
REC] on t he main unit several times until t he counter appear s.
RQT841 5
26
Povratak na pirjaš
nji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta.
Početak snimanja
≥
Snimanje TV programa (➡ 24)
≥
Vremensko snimanje (➡ 28)
≥
Kopiranje sa video rekordera (➡ 58)
Fleksibilno snimanje
5
(Snimanje koje staje u preostalo vrijeme snimanja )
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Uređaj podešava najbolju sliku za preostalo vrijeme snimanja
.
Kada želite po četi snimanje
Pritisnite [▲▼, ◄►] za odabir
“Start” i pritisnite [ENTER].
≥Snimanje počinje
XP
SP
LP
EP
∫
Korištenje “Flexible Rec” ke dobro u sljedećim
situacijama
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥Kada je preostali prostor na disku premalen za odabir bilo kojeg
drugog modea
≥Kada želite snimiti dugačke programe sa najboljom kvalitetom
slike
[HDD]
≥Kada želite snimiti na HDD tako da mogu biti
Kopirani na disk od 4.7 GB
≥Nemorateeditirati,snimljeni materijal
∫Za prestanak gledanja
Pritisnite [].
e.g. , HDD
Preostalo
vrijeme
snimanja
HDD
REC 0:59
ARD
M 1/M 2
L R
Playing while you are recording
[HDD ] [RAM]
Npr., Snimanje 90 minut nog programa na disk
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
Ako odaberete XP mode, program neće stati na disk.
Ako pokušate snimiti ovaj program
u XP modeu, samo će prvih 60
minuta stati na disk
4.7GB
DVD- RAM
Pritisnite [1] (PLAY) during recording.
There is no sound output while searching f orward or backward.
4.7GB
DVD- RAM
To stop play
Pritisnite [∫
].
Ako odaberete SP mode, program će stati na disk .
Svejedno,ostat će 30 minuta
praznog prostora.
4.7GB
DVD- RAM
Ako odaberete “Flexi ble Rec ” program će stati točno na
disk.
To stop recording
2 seconds af ter play stops, pritisnite [∫
].
To stop timer recording
2 seconds af ter play stops
1 Pritisnite [∫
].
2 Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Stop Recording ” i pritisnite
[ ENTER] .
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
4.7GB
DVD -RAM
Potreban prostor za snimanje
Priprema
≥Odaberite kanal na vanjskom uređaju.
≥Pritisnite [ DRIVE SELECT] za odabir HDD ili DVD drivea.
1
Dok je uređaj stopiran
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “To
Others”i pritisnite [ENTER].
3
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Flexible
Rec” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Record in FR mod e.
4
Maxi mum rec. time
Set rec. time
8 Sat 00 Min.
8 Sat 00 Min.
Start
Cancel
Maksimalno vrijeme snimanja
Ovo je maksimalno vrijeme
Snimanja u EP (8 Sati)
mode.
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Sati” i
≥You can als o change the drive and play while recording . Pritisnite
[DRIVE SELECT].
1
2
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
during recording.
Pritisnite [▲▼, ◄►] za odabir
a title
i pritisnite [ENTER].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
To stop play
Pritisnite [∫
].
To exi t the Direct Navi gato r screen
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Pritisnite [ DI RECT NAVI GATOR] to exit
screen.
2[ENTER].
If the recording is on the ot her drive
“Min.” i pritisnite [▼▲] za
podešavanje vremena
snimanja.
• Mož
etepodesitivrijemeisabrojč
animgumbima
• Nemož
etesnimatiduž
eod 8 sati.
gumbi.
[).
RQT8415
27
Vremensko snimanje
Korištenje GUIDE Plus+ sistema za
izradu vremenskih snimki
OPEN/ C
L OSE
EX T LI N
K
SVIDEO IN VI DE OI N L /MON O-AUD IO
DV I N
AV3
REC
DRIVE
CH
k1 . 3
IN- R
REC
EXT LINK
DVD
Í
Brojčani
gumbi
AV
PAG E
2
5
8
0
1
4
7
*
3
6
9
STOP
CH
CH
1
Pritisnite [GUIDE].
Landscape
15.7. Tue
15.7. Tue 15:05
DELETE
ShowView
INPUT SELECT
Time:
PLAY/x1.3
Pauza
PROG /CHECK
PROG/CHECK
GUIDE
15:00
Die Abschl... Freunde...
-24 Hr
RETURN
RETURN
S
CREAT E
CHAPTER
S.O.S Style & ...
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
info
S SUB MENU PAGE DisplayMode
GUIDE
PAGE +
2
ENTER
SU B MENU
16:30
Flieg e-Die Talksho w
Ric hterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexande r...
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade Yu-...
Gilmore...
...
7th Heaven
TIMERREC
▼▲◄►
ENTER
16:00
... Derrick Heute in ... Bianca-Wege...
DasFamiliengericht DasJugendgericht
RETURN
SUB MENU
“Red”
“Green”
REC
15:30
Ta... Abenteuer...
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7
SLO W/SEARC H
PAUS E
Prog.Type
AllTypes
Gilmore girls
16:05~17:05
ShowVii ew
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
■
VOLUM E
CH
DRII V E
SELEC T
Prije uporabe GUIDE Plus+ si stema
≥
Lista TV programa se ne prikazuje nakon kupovine uređaja.
≥
Morate završ
iti inicijalno podeš
avanje za koriš
tenje GUIDE
Plus+ sistema.
Pogledajte “G UIDE Plus+ sistemske opcije” (➡ 19) za
više informacija.
TV
Í
ODABIR
DISKA
DRIVE
SELECT
Mož
ete napraviti vremensko snimanje odabirom ž
eljenog
programa.
MANU AL SKII P
REC
REC MOD E EX T LIIN K DIRECT TV REC
AUD I O
STATU S DISPLAY TIME SLII P
“Blu e”
EXT LINK
Pritisnite [▲▼, ◄►] za odabir
programa.
3
Pritisnite [ENTER].
Timer
Recording
Remain
D VD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
12:54:00
REC MODE
Name
Date
Star t
Stop
16:00
17:00
HDD
1 ARD 15. 7. TUE
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
4
Pritisnite [ENTER].
Opcije su pohranjene i timer je ukjučen.
(“M 1” ili “M 2”).
15.7. Tue 15:05
Landscape
15.7. Tue
≥(^ HDD] Ako stavite “Rec for High Speed dubbing” prema “ON”
prije snimanja na HDD, mož
ete kasnije brzinski prijenos
(proglasi) programirati prema DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD -video
format) i +R.
Timer
Recording
Prije snimke
No.
F01
≥
Pogledajte “Koriš
tenje DVD-R, DVD-RW i +R na ovom uređ
aju”
za viš
e informacija (stranica 7).
≥
Uključ
ite televiziju i izaberite odgovarajuć
i video unos ovisno o
ovom uređaju.
OFF
≥
Potvrdite program i napravite izmjene,ako je potrebno
koristeći [▲▼, ◄►] (➡ 30, desna kolumna, korak 3).
≥
Kada se “-- ---” pojavi u “Name” koloni, ne možete podesiti
vremensko snimanje. Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir željene
programske pozicije. Nakon što ste unijeli informacije o TV
postaji, one ostaju u memoriji uređaja.
See al so “I mportant savjets for recording” (➡ 8).
Priprema
SP
Programme Name
Fliege-Die Talkshow
≥
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R Kada snimate dvojezič
ne emisije, samo audio
koji je izabran u “dvojezič
nom audio Izboru” (stranica 56) je
zabiljež
en
15. 7. TUE
HDD
VPS
DVD Mod e PDC
Name
ARD
Remain
P rog. Type
All T ypes
Gilmore girls
16:05~17:05
Time:
15:00
ARD
ZDF
Ta... Abenteuer...
15:30
16:00
HDD 30:24 SP
Start
Ikona timera
D VD 1:58 SP
12:56:00
Date
16:30
F Fliege-DieTalksho w
... Derric k Heute in ... Bianca-W e ge...
Stop
15. 7. TUE
HDD
VPS Drive
DVD Mod e PDC space
HDD SP OFF
OK
15. 7. TUE 19:00 20:00
New Timer Programme
Provjerite da je “O K”
Prikazano.
(➡ 31, Check, change or
delete a programme).
Ponovite korake 2–4 za programiranje snimanja.
[Savjet]
≥
Ako je “NTSC” odabran za “TV Syst em” (➡ 70), GUIDE Plus+
sistem se ne može koristiti.
∫
Za poništavanje snimanja,dok je ono već
počelo(➡ 31)
∫
Otpuštanje uređaja iz standby-a
(➡ 31)
∫
Savjeti o vremenskom snimanju (➡ 31)
RQT841 5
28
Operacije u GUIDE Plus+ sistemu
Odabir programa iz ž
eljene kategorije
Osnovne operacije
Pritisnite [GUIDE] za mijenjanje pogleda.
Landscape view
15.7. Tue 15:05
Landscape
15.7. Tue
Prog. Type
All Types
Gilmore girls
16:05~17:05
Time:
ARD
ZDF
RTL
SAT1
RTL2
VOX
PRO7
15:00
...
7th Heaven
Die Abschl... Freund e...
RETURN
Gilmore...
1
S SUB MENU PAGE Display Mode
17:47~17:49
17:49~18:20
18:20~18:50
-24 Hr
Prog. Type
All Types
VOX PR O7
Pr og.Type
RETURN
Podmeni za odabranu kategoriju se pojavljuje. Na primjer:
Pritisnite [ ▲▼] za odabir glavne kategorije filmova.
Pojavljuju se podkategorije sa nekoliko dodatnih izbornika
filmovas
(npr. Svi tipovi, Akcioni, Animirani, Komedije itd),
Marienhof
Prog. Type
S SUB MENU PAGE GUIDE
+24 Hr
TIMER REC
Brisant
T agess chau
V erbotene Liebe
+24 Hr
P or trait
Pr og.Type
All Types
15.7Tue
AllT ypes
ARD ZDF RT L S AT1 R TL2 V OX
PR O7
All
M ovies
15:00~15:15 Tag esscAction
hau
Spo rt
15:15~16:00 Abe nteuerWildnis
Animation
Children
Comed
y
16:00~17:00 Fliege -Die
Talksho
wOther
Drama
17:00~17:15 Ta ge
ssc hau um fünf
Romance
17:15~17:47
Brisant
SciFi
17:47~17:49
Tage sschau
Thriller
Adventure
17:49~18:20
Ver botene
Liebe
Marienhof
18:20~18:50
-24 Hr
Tagess chau
Abenteuer Wildnis
Fliege- DieTalksh ow
Tagess chau um fünf
TIMER REC
RETURN
15.7. Tue 15:05
PAGE +
P or trait
15.7Tue
15:00~15:15
15:15~16:00
16:00~17:00
17:00~17:15
17:15~17:47
Pritisnite “Blue” gumb za prikaz
listu glavne kategorije.
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir
glavne kategorije.
Prog. Type
info
GUIDE
2
S.O.S Style & ...
+24 Hr
ARD ZDF RTL SAT1 RTL2
Promjena postaja
16:30
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...
Detektiv DuelM... Beyblade Yu-...
TIMER REC
15.7. Tue 15:05
16:00
... Derric k Heute in ... Bianca- Wege...
DasFamiliengericht DasJugendgericht
-24 Hr
Portrait view
15:30
Ta... Abenteue r... Fliege-DieTalksh ow
Display Mode
PAGE +
Landscape view
1 Pritisnite [◄] dok se ne osjenč
a
lista programa.
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir postaje.
3 ≥Zagledanjeprograma:
3
Pritisnite [ ◄] za odalzak na
podkategoriju
menu.
4 Pritisnite
[▲▼] za vašizbor.
5
Pritisnite “Red” gumb.
≥Zagledanjeprograma
prekocijelogekrana:
Pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [ENTER].
12.1. W ed 15:05
Po rtrait
Prog.Type
M ovies
Action
ARD ZDF RTL S AT1 R TL2 VOX P RO7
(npr. , Akcija)
12. 1.Wed:20:00~21:30 The fast andthe fury
21:30~23:00 Ronin
23:00~01:15 Noch 60 Sekunden
Pritisnite [GUIDE] za povratak na
Landscape view.
13. 1.Thu: 19:15~21:00
Der Sturm
21:00~22:30 Speed 2
14. 1. Fri: 22:30~23:00 Mission Impossible
Portrait view
1 Pritisnite [ ▼] dok se lista postaja
ne označi.
2 Pritisnite [ ◄►] za odabir a
st ation.
3 ≥Zagledanjetrenutnogprorgramau
prozorupregleda:
Pritisnite “Red” gumb.
≥Zagledanjeprograma
prekocijelogekrana:
Pritisnite [ENTER].
23:00~01:30
Volcano
Prog. Type
TIMER REC
inf o
S SUB MENU
RETURN
6
PAGE PAGE +
Pritisnite [▲▼] za prolazak kroz
GUIDE Plus+ listu.
Pritisnite [GUIDE] za povratak na
Portrait view.
Gledanje
programa za drugi
dan
≥Skočite naprijed 24 sati
Pritisnite“Green” gumb za skakanje
naprijed za jedan dan.
≥Povratak za 24 sata
Pritisnite “Red” gumb.
Mož
ete se samo vratiti na trenutno
vrijeme
Navigacijakroz
GUIDE Plus+ listu.
Pritisnite [▲▼, ◄►]Samo trenutni i
sljedeći programi se prikazuju .
Traž
enjekroz
GUIDE Plus+ listu.
Pritisnite [W X CH].
Programske
informacije
(Programi sa
simbolom)
Dodatne informacije o programu se
prikazuju.
Pritisnite
Povratak na prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta .
RQT8415
29
Vremensko snimanje
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
Ručno programirano
vremensko snimanje
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings
Entering SHOWV IEW numbers is an easy way of t imer recording. You
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.
1
1
Timer
Recording
Pritisnite
ShowVi ew
Recor d
Remain
Pritisnite [PROG/CHECK].
No.
Remain
Name
F 01
ARD
12:53:00
DVD 1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
HDD
VPS Drive
Stop DVD Mod e PDC space
Star t
15. 7.TUE 19:00 20:00 HDD SP OFF OK
New Timer Programme
D VD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
Date
15. 7. TUE
2
Input ShowView Number 0-9,i pritisnite ENTER.
2
3
Pritisnite the brojčani gumbi to enter
the SHOW VIEW number.
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “New
Timer Programme” i pritisnite [ENTER].
3 Pritisnite [►] za pomicanje
Promjenite odabire sa [▲▼].
Timer
Recording
Pritisnite [2] to move back to correct a
digit.
Pritisnite
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP
Name
Date
Remain
Star t
Stop
22:00
22:30
HDD
Date
OFF
Programme Name
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Name
SP
DVD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
Start
Stop
HDD
VPS
DV D Mod e PDC
16:00
17:00
HDD
1 ARD 15. 7. TUE
15. 7. TUE
HDD
VPS
DVD Mode PDC
1 ARD 15. 7.TUE
Timer
Recor ding
D VD 1:58 SP
12:54:00
SP
OFF
≥
Pritisnite i držite [ ] za početak Start (Start time) i
Programme Name
Stop (Finish time) u 30-minutnim koracima.
≥Confirm the programme and make correct ions if necessary
using [▲▼, ◄►] (➡ right column, st ep 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir desired
programme
position. After you have ent ered the informat ion of a TV
stat ion, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
4
≥
Možete p odesiti Ime (Programme position/TV Stat ion
Name), Da tum, Start (Start time), i Stop (Finish time) sa
brojčanim gumbima.
Pritisnite [ENTER].
a. Tjedni timer: SUN>--->SAT
The settings are stored and t he timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
Timer
Reco rding
No. Name
Timer icon
F 01
ARD
≥PDC (➡stranica 21)
ON!) OFF (– – –
)
Remain
Date
15. 7. TUE
New T
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicat e timer re cording
standby has been activat ed.
Timer
Recor ding
No.
F 01
Name
ARD
Remain
Date
HDD 30:24 SP
Start
≥Ime programa
Pritisnite [ ] odaberite “Programme Name” i
pritisnite [ENTER]
DVD 1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
HD D
VPS Drive
Stop DVD Mode PD C space
15. 7. TUE 19:00 20:00 HDD SP OFF OK
New Timer Programme
Check to make sure “OK”
is displ ayed (➡ 31).
Repeat st eps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
4
Pritisnite [ENTER].
Opcije su pohranjene.
∫
To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)
Timer
Recording
∫
To release the unit from recording standby
(➡
No. Name
Ikona timera
F01
ARD
Remain
Date
15. 7. TUE
New T
∫
Savjets on timer recording (➡
Timer
Recording
No.
F01
Name
ARD
Remain
Date
HDD 30:24 SP
Start
D VD 1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
HDD
VPS Drive
Stop DVD Mod e PDC space
15. 7. TUE 19:00 20:00 HDD SP OFF
New Timer Programme
OK
Uvjerite se da je
“OK”prikazan
Ponovite korake 2–4 za ostala programiranja.
RQT841 5
30
Poništavanje snimanja kada je ono većpočelo
1
Provjera,promjena ili brisanje programa
≥Kod svakog gašenja uređaja,mož
ete promijeniti
programe pritiskom na [PROG/CHECK].
Dok je uređaj uključen
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir
diska i pritisnite [■].
Pritisnite [PROG/CHECK].
Ikone
Stop Recor ding
Program se trenutno snima.
Timer reco rding in progress.
Stop this timer reco rding?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
Doći će do kolizije između 2 programa
Cancel
Stop Reco rding
SELECT
ENTER
2
RETURN
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Stop
Recording” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Disk je bio pun i nije izvršeno snimanje.
Ako stopirate vremensko snimanje, bit će poništeno.
Materijal je bio zaštićen od kopiranja,pa isto nije bilo
izvršeno.
Oslobađanje uređaja iz stand by modea
X Snimanje nije završeno zbog toga što je disk bio
prljav..
≥Čak i kada je uređaj isključen, možete prikazati listu
snimanja pritiskom na [PROG/CHECK].
1
2
Pritisnite [PROG/CHECK].
Timer
Recor ding
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir programa
Remain
No. Name
Date
HDD 30:24 SP
Start
DVD 1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
HDD
VPS Drive
Stop DV D Mode PDC space
New Timer Programme
i pritisnite “crveni” gumb.
Pritisnite ENTER to store new programm e.
ENTER
RETURN
Savjeti o vremenskom snimanju
*Tajmer snimke su aktivirane bez obzira na to da li je uređaj
uključ
en ili ne.
Poruka prikazana u “Disc space” liniji
OK:
Ako uređaj ne može pronaći preostalo vrijeme.
> (Date): za snimanje diskova-odredite dnevne tjedne ili
*Tajmer snimke poč
nu kada se dosegne podeš
eno vrijeme č
ak i
ako je reprodukcija uključ
ena.
mjesečne planove za snimanje.
*Tajmer snimke ne poč
inju dok je uređ
aj u edit
modeu(sinkronizacija) u normalnoj brzini (stranica 43).
*Ako je uređaj uključ
en kada tajmer poč
ne, ono ostane uključ
eno
nakon š
to snimke svrš
e. Ne isključ
uje se automatski. Mož
ete
ugasitti uređaj tijekom tajmera.-“F” bljesne na oko 5 sekundi kada
uređ
aj ne mož
e uć
i u stand by za timer
Program
∫
Promjena programa
Pritisnite [] za odabir programa i pritisnite [ENTER].
Program
Nije snimljeno
∫
Brisanje programa
Pritisnite [] za odabir programa pritisnite [¢ CANCEL].
Snimljeno
Snimljeno
∫
Izlazizliste programiranja
*Ako je uređaj stavljen u tajmer za stanje pripravnosti najkasnije 10
minuta prije programiranog tajmera -poč
etno vrijeme, “F” bljesne na
uređ
aju. U ovom sluč
aju, pritisnite [F TAJMER] stavite uređaj u
tajmeru u stanje pripravnosti.
Pritisnite [PROG/CHECK].
∫
Zapostavu uređaja u stand by mode
Pritisnite [F TI MER].
*Kada programirate uzastopne tajmere poč
nite odmah zaredom,
uređ
aj ne mož
e zabiljež
iti dio u poč
etku kasnijih programa [nekoliko
sekunda kada snimate s HDD ili DVD-ORAM
i približno 30 sekunda
kada snimate s DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-video format) i +R]
Uređaj se gasi i “F” se prikazuje na ekranu,kao znak da je uređaj
podešen za vremnsko snimanje.
RQT8415
31
Vremensko snimanje
Auto Renewal Snimanje
Relief Snimanje
Kada je disk snimanja na “DVD” i kada nije ostalo diska, snimanje se
prebacuje na “HDD”. Ako nema diska u prostoru za disk
vremensko snimanje počinje,i disk snimanja se prebacuje na
HDD.
≥Direct Navigator prikazuje koji se programi snimaju
(“ ” je prikazano.) (➡ 34).
≥
Ako je vrijeme preostalo na HDD nedovoljno, što više programa
će se probati snimiti na HDD.
[HDD]
Ako snimite program na HDD svaki dan ili svaki tjedan koristeći
vremensko snimanje, uređaj će snimiti nove programe preko starih.
Ova funkcija radi samo kada je odabrano tjedno ili dnevno snimanje
1
2
Pritisnite [PROG/CHECK].
3
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir programa
i pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “RENEW”
4
kolone.
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “ON” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Timer
Recording
Name
1 ARD
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP
D VD 1:58 SP
12:54:00
Date
SUN
Start
Stop
22:00
22:30
15. 7. TUE
HDD
VPS
DVD Mod e PDC RENEW
HDD
SP OFF
ON
Programme Name
VPS/PDC funkcija
VPS (Video Programme Syst em) ili PDC (Programme Delivery Cont rol) je napredna funkcija koja omogućava snimanje prorgama od
njihovog početka do kraja kod vremenskog snimanja..
RQT841 5
32
Kod VPS /PDC snimanja
≥
Koristite VPS/PDC vrijeme za snimanje sa TV programa.
≥Postavite “VPS/ PDC” na “OFF” kada vrijeme snimanja nije VPS/ PDC.
≥VPS/PDC se ne izvršava kada je VPS/PDC vrijeme netočno, čak i ako je na jednu minutu. Za
saznavanje VPS/PDC vremena, pogledajte Teletext ili novine..
–Ako vrijeme u novinama ima dva S HOW V IEW broja, koristite SH OW VIEW broj za VPS/PDC
Ako želite nastaviti sa VPS/PDC snimkama koristeći S HOW V IEW programiranje .
–Tvornička opcija za “VPS/PDC” je “OFF”.
Kada je VP S/PDC signal slab zbog
teško ća u prijemu. Kada TV postaja
ne odašilje regularan VP S/P DC
signal .
Vremensko snimanje će biti izvršeno u normalnom modeu (bez VPS/PDC) čak i ako je bilo
programirano za VPS/PDC.
U ovom slučaju, čak i ako se vremensko snimanje izvrš
i, bit će snimljeno određeni drugi dan.
Ako je početno vrijeme napisano u
novinama drugačije od stvarnog.
Podesite “VPS/PDC” na “O FF”.
Snimanje sa vanjske opreme
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Pogledajte “Važni savjeti za snimanje ” (➡ 8).
Izrada snimki na TV-u
Link timer recordinga sa vanjskom
opremom — EXT LINK
RA M] [DVD-R]
Ako vanjska oprema (npr.satelitski reciever) sa vremenskom
funkcijom je spojen na AV2 terminal ovog uređ
aja sa
1 Izradite programske snimke na TV-u.
21-pinskim Scart kabelom ( stranica 15), moguć
e je kontrolirati
snimanje sa uređ
ajem.
2 Pritisnite [HDD] ili [DVD] za odabir
diska.
Priprema
Ako odaberete DVD drive, umetnite disk (stranica 22).
3. Ugasite uređaj.
≥Promjenite “Ext Link” u SETUP meniju za odabir spojenoj opremi
≥Pritisnite [DVD] za odabir DVD-a.
Ext Link 1: Start i stop timer su kontrolirani
1 Izrazite timer na vanjskom ure đ
aju.
2 Pritisnite [HDD] ili [DVD] za odabir di ska za snimanje.
Uređaj se gasi u stand by mode
Ako odaberete DVD drive, umetnite disk (stranica 24).
≥Snimanje počinje,kada je signal primljen sa spojenog uređaja.
3 Pritisnite [EXT LINK].
≥Dok je god signal prisutan sa spojenog uređaja,on će snimati
Kada se poruka pojavljuje na ekranu, pritisnite
[ ] za odabir “Yes” (nastavak snimanja programa)
ili “Cancel” (poništavanje snimanja) i pritisnite [ENTER].
Snimanje sa digitalnog satelita/recievera
Uređaj se gasi “EXT Link” svijetli na uređaju.
Poniš
tavanje vanjskog uređaja
Pritisnite [EXT LINK] Za prestanak vremenskog snimanja.
≥Mož
ete pritisnuti I drž
ati [] na glavnom uređaju za viš
e od 3
sekunde za prestanak snimanja.
≥U sluč
aju za izbjegavanje než
eljenih pogreš
aka, pritisnite [EXT
LINK] za brisanje opcija nakon završ
etka snimanja.
Priprema
• Spojite digitalnu opremu
Za informaciju
1
Dok je uređaj stopiran
Pritisnite [INPUT SELECT] za odabir
ulaznog kanala opreme koju ste
priključili.
≥Video koji se snima automatski se pojavljuje na vaš
em TV-u
nakon snimanja preko AV1 terminala sa 21-pinskim Scart kabelom.
≥Funkcija ne radi sa svom opremom,posavjetujte se prije spajanja.
npr., Ako ste spojili AV2 ulazne terminale, odaberite “AV2”.
2
Pritisnite [REC MODE] za odabir
modea snimanja.
3
Odaberite kanal na drugoj opremi.
RQT8415
33
Reprodukcija video sadržaja
2
Selecting recorded programmes (titles ) to play—
Direct Navigator
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
OPEN/CLOSE
REC
DR
I VE
k1 .3
DVD
Í
1
Í
DIRECT NAVIG ATOR
007
AV
3
6
9
- --
DIRECT NAVIG ATOR
ARD 11.10. S AT
Rectime
0:52(SP)
-- -
Premotavanje
►
PROG /CHECK
DIRECT
NAVIG ATOR,
“Top Menu”
Select
Pauza
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
- --
Name
ARD
ZDF
A V2
ARD
A V2
ZDF
ARD
ARD
N ext
Pre vious
Date Day
26. 9. FRI
27. 9. S AT
3. 10. FRI
3. 10. FRI
4. 10. S AT
10.10. FRI
10.10. FRI
11.10. SAT
VIDEO
PICTURE
Time Name of title
13:30
12:15
20:00
22:05
16:10
9:25
13:30
21:00
Page 01/01
ENTER
Ne xt
S SUB MENU
RETURN
DELET E
PLAY/x1.3
Pag e 02/02
S SUB MENU
Title View
HDD
-- -
- --
Previous
ENTER
ShowViiew
SL OW/SEARC H
PAUSE
≥Table Di splay
PICTURE
CH
INPUT
SELECT
SKIIP
VIDEO
008
ARD 10.10. FRI
2
5
8
0
ST OP
Title View
HDD
PAGE
Premotavanje
■
≥Thumbnai l Display
VOLUM E
CH
DRII VE
SELECT
1
4
7
Brojčani
gumbi
1 ■3
TV
1 Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Select
RETURN
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
1 Pritisnite [SUB MENU] while Thumbnai l Display is
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Table Display” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
≥turned
The display
of f. appearance last used is saved even aft er the unit is
2 [HDD] [RAM]
Pritisnite “Crveni” gumb za odabir “VIDEO”.
DIRECTN AVIG ATOR
Title Vi ew
VIDEO
HDD
PICTURE
- --
▼▲,2,
1 ENTER
SUB MENU
ENTE R
SUB MEN U
CRE AT E
CHAPTER
MANUA L SKIIP
“Red”
REC
AUDII O
[HDD] Za sortiranje datoteka zbog lakš
eg pretraživanja
RETUR N
S
REC MODE
EXT LIIN K DIIRECT TV REC
STA TUS DIISPLAY TIME SLII P
AUDIO
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CHAPTER
TIME SLIP
1 Pritisnite [SUB MENU].
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Sort” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
3 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir datoteke i pritisnite
[ENTER].
≥
Nije moguće neprekidno svirati dvostrane diskove,veććih morate
izvaditi I staviti ponovno.
≥
Korištenjem 8 cm DVD-RAM, izvadite disk iz catrigea.
.
3 Pritisnite [▲ ▼►◄] za odabir titla i pritisnite
Priprema
• Odaberite ž
eljeniulaz.
[ENTER].
• Upaliteuređaj.
Mož
ete.označ
iti i sa brojčanim gumbima
1
npr.,
Pritisnite [DVD] za odabir DVD-a.
DVD indikator se pali.
2
Pritisnite [OPEN/CLOSE] za otvaranje
vratiju I unesite disk
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]
5:
[0]  [0] [5] 5:
[0]  [5]
15:
[0]  [1] [5] 15:
[1]  [5]
115:
[1]  [1] [5]
Prikaz ostalih stranica
≥
Pritisnite gumb ponovno za zatvaranje vratiju.
Prema gore.
Pritisnite [▲▼ ►◄] za odabir “Previous” ili “Next” te pritisnite
[ENTER].
[
Trenutno se snima.
Diskovi
Zaštićeno.
Nije snimljeno zbog zaštite
Umetnite sa
strelicom prema
unutra
Automatski odabir diska(➡ 24)
3
Pritisnite [►] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]
Reprodukcija po č
inje sa zadnje kreirane opcije.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD]
RQT841 5
34
Reprodukcija po č
inje sa početka.
Ne može se reproducirati,jer su podaci oštećeni.
∫
Kada se meni pojavi na TV-u
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Pritisnite [▲▼►◄] za odabir i pritisnite [ENTER].
Neke opcije b mogle biti odabrane sa brojčanim gumbima.
[VCD]
Pritisnite brojčane gumbe za odabir opcije.
npr.,
5:
[0]  [5]
15:
[1]  [5]
≥Za povratak na glavni ekran
[DVD-V] Pritisnite [TOP MENU] ili [SUB MENU].
[TOP MENU].
[RETURN].
[DVD-A] Pritisnite
[VCD] Pritisnite
Operations
during reprodukcije
play
Operacije tijekom
Stop
Stop
Pritisnite [∫
].
The
Pritisnite
stopped position
[]. is memorized.
DVD- R A M
Stopirana pozicija ostaje u memoriji.
Resume
play functi on
Pritisnite [1 ] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped
position
sviranja
≥
INastavak
f [∫
] is pritisniteed
several times, t he position is cleared.
Pritisnite [] (PLAY) za nastavak reprodukcije.
≥
The position is cleared if the t ray is opened.
≥
[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is c leared if the unit is turned of f.
Pause
Pause
p auze.
Pritisnite [].
Pritisnite
za prestanak
Pritisnite
[;].
Traž
enje
Search
Pritisnite
[]ili
[].
Pritisnite
[6]
or [5].
Skip
Skip
Pritisnite [] ili [].
During
≥
Kod svakog
play pritiska
or while
poveć
paused,
avate brzinu
pritisnite
traženja. [:] or [9].
Poč
etak sa
selektiranog
Starting
dijela from a selected
title
Quick View
[RAM]
Brzina prikaza se može poveć
ati
bez utjecaja na zvuk.
Slow-motion
[RAM] [DVD- R] [DVD- A] [DVD-V]
[VCD]
Frame-by-frame
[RAM] [DVD- R] [DVD- A [DVD-V]
[VCD]
Quick
View
[HDD ] [ RAM]
Pritisnite [; ] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥
Naspeed
glavnom
uređajuup
pritisnite
I drž
ite
[
]ili [ [+RW]
].
≥
The
increases
to 5 steps.
([+R]
[+R]DL]
up t o 3 steps)
≥
Brzina se povećava za 5 koraka.
≥
Pritisnite
[1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥
Pritisnite [] (PLAY) za
≥
Audio
is heard durin g first level search forward.
ponavljanje
playa.
Možete
Isk ljučIti zvuk
tIjekom
pretrage
(➡stranica
“PLAY
k1.3
& Audio
during
[DVD-A]
(excluding
motion
picture
parts)
[CD] and 45,
MP3
: Audio
is heard
during
allSearch”).
levels of search.
Audio
se čuej
cijele
pretrage.
[DVD-A]
[CD]
DivX
: Audio
is tijekom
not heard
during
all levels
of search.
≥
Dependin g on the disc, Search may not be possible.
Skip to the t itle, chapt er or t rack you want to play.
≥
Each pritisnite increases the number of skips.
Pritisnite
brojč
ane gumbe.
≥
Div
X : Back ward
direction
[:] only.
Npr ., 5 :
[ 0] ➡[ 5]
[CD] (MP3 diskovi)
15: [1] ➡[5]
Pritisnite the brojčani gumbi.
5:
15:
[0] ➡[0] ➡[5 ]
[0] ➡[1] ➡[5]
Play st arts
fromOdabir
the select
ed title, c hapter or track.
[DVD-A]
grupe
Dok je stopirano (screen saver je prikazan na TV-u ➡desno)
≥
[HDD]
5:
[5]
e.g., 5: [ 0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
≥
Ovo
je uređaj stopiran sa nekim diskovima
15:radi
[0]samo
➡ [1]kada
➡ [5]
.
≥
MP3 and JPEG/TIFF
e.g.,
5: [ 0] ➡
[0] ➡
➡ [5](PLAY/a1.3).
Pritisnite
i drž
ite[0][]
15: [0] za
➡povratak
[0] ➡ [1]na
➡normalnu
[5]
≥
Pritisnite
brzinu.
≥
Ne
radi
ako
je
uređ
aj
podeš
en na “Off” u “PLAY k1.3 & Audio during Search” (➡stranica
≥
[DVD-A] Selecting groups
45). stopped (screen saver is displayed on the tel evision ➡ right)
While
Input a 1-digit number
e.g., 5: [5]
Dok
pauzi
[
]iliDVD
[Audio.)
].
≥
O
ther ste
discsu(You
can pritisnite
select a track
with
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.
, 5: se
[0] poveć
➡ [5]ava za 5 koraka.
≥
Brzina
15: [1][]
➡ [5](PL AY) za početak sviranja.
≥
Pritisnite
≥
Samo
smjerovi
naprijed.
[VCD] saver is displayed on the tel evision ➡ above) with some
≥
This
works
only prema
when st
opped (screen
discs.
≥
Uređaj će se pauzirati ako se slow motion prikazuje duže od 5 minuta.
≥
[VCD] (with playback control)
IfUyou
pritisnite
the brojč
while
pauzi,
pritisnite
[ani
gumbi
]ili [
]. stopped (the above screen saver is displayed on the
television)
you can
cancelsljedeć
PBC. u(Elapsed
≥
Svaki pritisak
prikazuje
sličicu. play time appears on the unit’s display.)
≥
Pritisnite [] (PL AY) za ponavljanje normalne reprodukcije.
Pritisnite
and
hold[VCD]
[1] (PLAY/a1.3).
≥
Smjer prema
naprijed.
Play spee d is quicker than normal.
≥
Pritisnite again to return to normal speed.
(Continued on the next page)
RQT8415
35
Reprodukcija video sadržaja
Za detalje pogledajte stranicu 34.
Operations during play
(continued)
Slow-motion
While paused, pritisnite [6] or [5].
[ HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[ +R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[ -RW‹VR›] [VCD]
The speed increases up to 5 s teps.
≥
Pritisnite [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥
[ VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥
The unit will pause if slow-motion play is cont inued for approximately 5 minut es
(excluding [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD]).
Frame-by-frame
While paused, pritisnite [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
[ HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[ +R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[ -RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Each pritisnite shows the next frame.
≥
Pritisnite and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥
Pritisnite [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥
[ VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
Skipping the specified
time (Time Slip)
1 Pritisnite [TIME SLIP].
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir the time
i pritisnite [ENTER].
[ HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[ +R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
-5 min
Pl ay skips the specified t ime.
≥Each time you pritisnite [ ▲▼], the t ime
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute
int ervals. (Pritisnite and hold for 10-minute
int ervals.)
Manual Skip
Pritisnite [MANUAL SKIP].
[ HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[ +R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Each t ime you pritisnite, pl ay restarts approximately 30 seconds
later.
Izrada poglavlja
Pritisnite [CREATE CHAPTER].
(➡ 44,
Title /Chapter)
This automat ically
disappears af ter
approximately 5
second s. To show the
screen again pritisnite
[TIME SLIP] again.
Poruka se prikazuje na 5 sekundi za potvrdu da je poglavlje
kreirano.
[ HDD] [RAM]
Mijenjanje audia tijekom reprodukcije
Pritisnite [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
MIjenjate kanale svakI put kada pritIsnete opcIju (stranica 42,
Soundtrack).
LR>L>R
^---------------}
LR
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Soundtrack
e.g., “L R” je odabrano
1 ENG
npr. , English je odabran.
[Savjet]
Ne možete promijeniti audio u sljedećim slučajevima.
≥
Kada je DVD-R disk umetnut,a DVD je selektiran kao izvor zvuka.
≥
Kada je mode snimanja XP i “Audio Mode for XP Recording” je podešeno na “LPCM” (stranica 67).
RQT841 5
36
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
Reprodukcija DivX diskova, MP3 diskova i fotografija
(JPEG/TIFF)
O DivX diskovima, MP3 diskovima i fotografijama (JPEG/TIFF)
DivX
Diskovi
File
format
Podaci o MP3
[-R] [CD]
Div X
≥
Datoteke moraju imati ekstenziju
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “. AVI” ili “.avi”.
broj mapa (groupa):300 mapa (grupa)
Broj mapa Maksimalni
(uključujući korijenski direktorij)
■Kompatibilni formati: ISO9660 nivo 1 ili 2 (osim proš
irenih
formata) i Joliet
■Maksimalan broj datoteka (staze) i mapa (grupiranje)
prepoznatljivo: 999 datoteka (staze) i 99 mapa (grupiranj)
Broj
datoteka
Maksimalni broj datoteka koje se mogu prepoznati§1 :
1
: 200 datoteka
■Ovaj uređaj je kompatibilan s multi-sessionima ali č
itanje ili
reprodukcija diskova ć
e potrajati ako postoji puno sessiona.
Podržane
verzije
Div X ver.3.11, 4.x, 5.x
Video
–Broj streamova: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DI VX, DV50
–Veličina slike: 32 x 32 do 720 x 576
–FPS(Frame Per Second): Do 30 fps
Audio
–Broj streamova: do 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
–više kanalni: AC3 je omogućen. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
GMC (G lobal Mot ion Compensation) nije podržano.
■Operacija mož
e potrajati prije završ
etka kada postoji mnogo
datoteka
(staze) i/ili mape (grupirane) i neke datoteke (staze) neć
e biti
prikazane i spremne za reprodukciju.
■Prikaz na ovom uređaju mogao bi se razlikovati od onog kako je
prikazano na ra č
unalu.
■Ovisno o tome kako vi stvorite disk, evidentira
(staze) i mape (grupirane) ć
e se reproducirati pjesme.
MP3
■Ovaj uređaj nije kompatibilna komponenta s packet-write
formatom.
Diskovi
[-R] [CD]
File
format
MP3
≥
Datoteke moraju imati ekstenziju “.mp3” ili “. MP3”.
Struktura MP 3 mapa
Broj
mapa
(grupa)
Maksimalni broj mapa (groupa):
300 mapa (grupa)
(uključujući korijenski direktorij)
Prefix sa 3-znamenkastim
brojem po redu kojem želite
reprodukciju
Broj
datoteka
(tracks)
Maksimalni broj datoteka koje se mogu prepoznati §1 :
3000 datoteka (tracks)
Bit rates
32 kbps do 320 kbps
Frekvencija 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/ 48 kHz
sempliranja
I D3 tagovi nije kompatibilno
Fotografije(JPEG, TI FF§2 )
Diskovi
Korijen
001
001 (folder =group)
001track.mp3 (file=track)
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
002 group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Reprodukcija
[-R] [CD]
Struktura fotografija
Datoteke se prikazuju po
redosljedu kojem su bili snimani
na disk.
Korijen
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
001
002 Fol der
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [CD] [SD]
003 Fo lder
004 Fo lder
File
format
File format: JPEG, TIFF (ne kompresiran RGB
chunky format)
≥
Datoteke moraju imati sufiks “. jpg”, “.JPG ”, “. tif” ili
“.TI F”.
Broj
piksela
34*34 do 6144*4096
(Sub sampling je 4: 2:2 ili 4:2:0)
Broj
mapa
[-R] [CD] Maksimalan broj mapa: 300 mapa-uključ
ujući
i korijenski direktorij)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] Maksimalan broj mapa 300 mapa
Broj
datoteka
[-R] [CD] Maksimalni broj datoteka koje se mogu
prepoznati §1 :300 0 datoteka
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] Uređaj može raditi sa maksimalno
3000 datoteka
MOTION
JPEG
nije kompatibilno
Reprodukcija
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
RQT8415
37
Reprodukijcija DivX diskova, MP3 diskova i fotografija
Reprodukcija DivX diskova
DVD
DVD
Í
Í
V OLUM E
CH
DRII V E
SELEC T
DRIVE SELECT
[-R] [CD]
Mož
ete reproducirati DVD-R i CD-R/CD-RW diskove koji sadrže
DivX video sadržaj.
TV
AV
PAGE
2
5
8
0
1
4
7
Brojčani
gumbi
3
6
9
ShowVii ew
1
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
Priprema
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir DVD drive-a.
CH
SLO W/SEARC H
Premotavanje
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
No.
001
■
STOP
PAUS E
PLA Y/x1.3
Folder1 : 00025
DivX Menu
CD(DivX)
Premotavanje
Nam e of Title
Tre e
ABC.avi
►
PROG /CHECK
P age
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
001/001
T otal Title : 001
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
ENTER
▼▲►◄
ENTER
SU B MENU
≥
Datoteke su tretirane kao nazivi
RETURN
S
CREAT E
CHAPTER
SUB MENU
STAUTS
RETU RN
MANU AL SKII P
REC
REC MOD E EXT LIINK DIRECT TV REC
AUD I O
STATU S DISPLAY TIME SLII P
RETURN
“Green”
2
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir titla i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Reprodukcija počinje na označenoj datoteci.
Odabir tipova podataka za reprodukciju
[-R] [CD]
Mož
ete reproducirati DVD-R i CD-R/CD-RW diskove koji sadrže
MP3 datoteke, DivX video sadržaje ili slike koje su bile snimljene
preko računala.
Ekran koji je prikazan dolje se pojavljuje kada umetnete disk koji
sadrži DivX video, MP3 datoteke ili fotografije (JPEG/ TI FF).
npr. ,
Play mode is set to DivX.
To play another type of file ,
select the file type
from Menu in FUNCIONS.
≥
Mož
eteodabratitarkusabrojč
animgumbima.
npr.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Stopiranje reprodukcije
Pritisnite [■
].
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Za odabir tipa datoteke
1 Pritisnite [RETURN].
2 Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
Play Mode : DivX
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)
Korištenje prikaza „tree“ za pretraživanje
1 Dok je prikazana lista datotek a
Pritisnite [►] dok je označeno „tree“prikaz
Menu
Reco rding
Copy
To Other s
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Fo lder
F 1/21
ENTER
12.02.2004
RETURN
Ima g e001
Ima g e002
Ima g e003
Ima g e004
Ima g e005
Ima g e006
Ima g e007
Ima g e008
Ima g e009
Ima g e010
DATA 1
DATA 2
3 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Menu” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
ENTER
RETU RN
Menu
Select file type.
DivX
MP3
JPEG
4 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir playback modea i
pritisnite [ENTER].
RQT841 5
38
Nemož
eteodabratimapukoja
nesadrž
ikompatibilne
datoteke.
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir mape i pritisnite
[ENTER].
Reprodukcija MP3 diskova
O DivX VOD sadrž
aju
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) sadržaj je enkriptiran zaštitno. Za
reprodukciju DivX VO D sadržaja na ovom uređaju,morate
Prvo registrirati uređaj.
Priprema
Pritisnite [DRI VE SELECT] za odabir the DVD drive.
Slijedite upute za registraciju:
Setup
[-R] [CD]
Mož
etereproducirati DVD-R i CD-R/CD-RW diskove koji sadrže MP3
Datoteke koje su snimljene na računalu.
1
DivX Registration
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Odabrana grupa
DivX (R)Video On Demand
G: Group no.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Men u
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
8
alfanumeričkih
znakova
G
1
T
1
TOTAL
1/111
T: Track no. U grupi
ENTER
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint It Yello w
6
006 Pyjamamama
Pre v.
7
007 Shrimps fr om Mar s
Ne xt
8
9
008 Starper son
009 Velvet Cuppermine
10
010 Ziggy Starfish
RETURN
•
Track
Tree
001 Both Ends Freezing
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
ENTER
• Nakon reprodukcije DivX VOD sadržaja,prikazuje se novi kod na
zaslonu. “DivX Registration”. Ne koristite ovak kod za kupovinu,ili
iznajmljivanje DivX VOD sadržaja. Ako koristite ovaj kod za
kupovinu,ili iznajmljivanje (rent) DivX VO D sadržaja, te pokušate
reproducirati film nećete više moći reproducirati niti jedan sadržaj
koji ste kupili sa starim kodom.
Gr oup
: My fa vorite
4
5
SELECT
RETURN
Total
1
2
3
Number
0 – 9
TOTAL: Track No./Total
tracks u svim grupama
No.
1
Pag e 001/024
Fileovi su tretirani kao grupe.
2
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir pjesme i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Reprodukcija počinje na odabranoj pjesmi.
≥Mož
ete odabrati ž
eljenu reprodukciju sa brojč
anim
gumbimai.
npr., 5:
[ 0] ➡ [ 0] ➡ [ 0] ➡ [5]
15:
[ 0] ➡ [ 0] ➡ [ 1] ➡ [5]
Završetak reprodukcije
Pritisnite [■
].
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Korištenje prikaza „tree“ za pronalaženje grupe
1 Dok je prikazan sastav datoteka
Pritisnite [►] dok je zasijenjen „tree“ mode
prikaza.
Menu
G
8
T
14
TOTA L
40/111
Number
0 – 9
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
Tre e
MP3 music
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Cze ch pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner savjets
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standar d number
001 Piano solo
002 V ocal
G 7/25
Ne mož
ete odabrati grupu
koja ne sadrž
i
kompatibilne datoteke.
2 Pritisnite [▲▼, ◄►] za odabir groupe i
pritisnite
[ENTER].
Povratak na prijaš
nji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
RQT8415
39
Reprodukijcija DivX diskova, MP3 diskova i fotografija
Pogledajte kontrole na stranici 38.
Reprodukcija fotografija
3
Pritisnite [▲▼, ◄►] za
odabir albuma i pritisnite [ENTER].
DIRECT N AVIG ATOR Picture (JPEG) Vi ew
HDD
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [CD] [SD]
≥
Mož
ete koristiti SD Memory kartice sa kapacitetom od 8 MB do 2
GB
(➡ 7).
≥
Mož
ete reproducirati mirne slike sa DVD-R ili CD-R/
CD-RW na PC.
.
Alb um Name
0001
VIDEO
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
-- - -
-- - -
-- - -
0002
Previous
ENTER
RETURN
PICTURE
e.g. , HDD
103__DVD
Pag e 001/001
S SUB MENU
Next
Select
Mož
ete odabrati album sa brojč
anim gumbima..
npr.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Dok je uređaj stopiran umetnite karticu u slot,pojavljuje se
ekran (➡ dolje)
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Album View”, pritisnite [ENTER]
te pročitajte korak 2 dolje.
≥
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir prijašnjeg ili sljedećeg albuma.
SD Card
Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
4
Pritisnite [▲▼, ◄►] za odabir
Copy Video (MPEG2)
mirne slike i pritisnite [ENTER].
SELECT
RETURN
ENTER
Odabir tipa podataka za reprodukciju ➡ 38
1
≥
Pritisnite [◄►] za prikaz prijašnje ili sljedeće slike.
≥
Korisne funkcije prilikom prikaza fotografija (➡ 41)
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT]
za odabir HDD, DVD ili SD drive.
Indikator se pali.
2
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
DIRECT NA VIGAT OR Album View
HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
Album View ekran
001
1.1. 06 Total 5
Date: 1. 1.2006
S
RETURN
Datum snimanja prve
slike u albumu/
Broj slika/
Ime albuma.
1.2. 06 Total 3
Date: 1. 2.2006
Pre vious
ENTER
Pa ge 01/01
Next
Pritisnite ENTER to
show pictures.
SUB MENU
Ovisno o digitalnoj kameri, ili softwareu za edititranje na
PC-u itd., datum snimanja možad neć
e biti prikazan . U ovom
slučaju datum će biti prikazan kao [--/--/--].
[HDD] [RAM ] Ako je “VIDEO ” odabran, pritisnite “Zeleni” gumb
za odabir “PICTURE”.
≥[-R] [CD]
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Folder
0001
Slikovni ekran
Picture (JPEG) View
103__DVD
0002
0005
0006
0009
-- - -
Previous
0003
0004
0007
0008
-- - -
-- - -
Pag e 001/001
Next
ENTER
RETURN
(➡ Krenite na korak 4)
Direct Navigator ikone
Slika je zaštićena.
Slika u kojoj je broj printanja podeš
en (DPOF) (➡ 49, 81).
Prikaz ostalih stranica
Pritisnite [ [▲▼, ◄►]] za odabir “Previous” ili “Next” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
RQT841 5
40
Mož
ete odabrati mirnu sliku sa sa brojč
anim gumbima..
Npr.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [ 1] ➡ [ 5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [ 1] ➡ [5]
Korisne funkcije tijekom reprodukcije
Početak Slide
Mož
eteprikazivatislikuposlik
Dok je prikazan P ICTURE (JPEG) VIEW ekran
Show-a
1 Pritisnite [ ] za odabir “Folder”i pritisnite[SUB MENU].
Slide Interval
2 Pritisnite [ ] za
Start Slide Show
odabir “Start Slide
Slide Show Setting
Show” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
≥Prikaztiminga
1 Pritisnite [] za odabir “Slide Interval” u koraku 2 i pritisnite [ENTER].
2 Pritisnite [] za odabir timinga (0–30 sekundi) i pritisnite [ENTER].
3 Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “On” or “Off” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Rotacija
1 Pritisnite [SUB MENU].
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
2 Pritisnite [ ] za odabir “Rotate RIGHT” ili
ENTER
RETURN
“Rotate LEFT” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
≥Ako izvadite SD karticu dok je DIRECT NAVIGATOR ekran prikazan, informacije o rotaciji slike neće
biti dobro pohranjeni. Izvadite SD karticu nakon što ste izašli iz DIRECT NAVIGATOR
ekrana.
Dok se reproducira slika
Zoom in
Zoom out
1 Pritisnite[SUB MENU].
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
2 Pritisnite [ ] za odabir “Zoom i pritisnite[ENTER].
Zoom in
≥Zaodabir originalne veličine slike [ ] za odabir “Zoom out” u koraku 2
ENTER
RETURN
i pritisnite [ ENTER].
≥Kod zumiranja,slika može biti «odrezana».
Opcije
Dok se reproducira slika
Pritisnite [STATUS] dvaput.
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date 1. 1. 2005
No.
3/9
Datum snimnaja
Izlaz iz ekrana opcija -Pritisnite [STATUS].
∫
Za odabir mirne slike u drugoj mapi
(➡ 7, Struktura mapa na ovom uređaju)
[RAM] [SD]
Prebacivanje na drugu mapu
(Samo ako je veći broj istih mapa)
1 Dok je Album V iew ekran prikazan
Pritisnite [SUB ME NU].
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Sel ect Fol der” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
[-R] [CD]
1 Dok je slikovni (JPEG )ekran prikazan
Pritisnite [▲▼, ◄►] za odabir “Folder” i pritisnite
[E NTER].
2 Pritisnite
[▲▼]
za odabir the JPEG
folder
i pritisnite [ENTER].
JPEG Menu
Picture(JPEG) View
Me nu
CD(JPEG)
103__DVD
F 1/3
0002
0003
0004
--- -
--- -
--- -
--- -
--- -
--- -
----
----
021216_0026
103_ DVD
Select Folder
Select folder to access.
Folder
CD(JPEG)
Folder
0001
104_DVD
105_DVD
\DCIM
Pritisnite ENTERto
set.
SELECT
ENTER
Previous
RETURN
P age 001/001
Next
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
S SUB MENU
RET URN
RQT8415
3 Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir the higher folder i pritisnite
[ENTER].
41
Korištenje menija/statusnih poruka
Diskmenu—Setting
meni-podešavanja
Disc
the disc content
DV D
Soundtrack§
Soundtrack
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The [RAM]
disc’s[DVD-R]
audio attributes appear.
Pojavljuju
[DVD-V]
[DVD-A]se atributi diska.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Select
the audio and language (➡ below, Audio attribute,
Podešavanje audio jezika (➡dolje).
Language).
[VCD] (SVCD) and Di vX
Select the soundtrack number.
Titlovi
≥
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
[RAM]
audio[DVD-R]
type. (Samo diskovi sa zapisanim informacijama o titlu)
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Subtitl e§
Upalite/ugasite
titlove i odaberite jezik (dolje,
[DVD-V]
[DVD-A]
TurnLanguage).
the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ below,
≥
Informacije o titlovima se mogu zapisati pomoću ovog
Language).
] [DVD-R]
[HDD] uređ
[RAM]aja.
[-R][RAM
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs
that
cont
ain
subt
itle on/off information)
Audio kanal [RAM] [VCD]
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥
Subtitle
on/off
cannot be recorded using this unit.
stranica
32, information
Mjenjanje audia
[VCD] (SVCD) and Di vX
§ [DVD-A]
Turn
the subtitle
[DVD-V]Angle
on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥
Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
STILL-P
subt it les.
(Mirna slika) [DVD-A]
TV
Í
Í
VOLUM E
CH
DRI V E
SELECT
AV
PAG E
2
5
8
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
ShowVii ew
DELET E
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
STO P
CH
SL OW/SEARC H
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
PROG /CHECK
ENTER
▼▲,2
,1
ENTER
SUB MEN U
CREAT E
CHAPTER
REC
STATUS
RETURN
S
AUD I O
REC MODE
MANUA L SKIIP
EXT LIIN K DIRECTT V REC
STA TUS DIISPLAY TIME SLII P
DISPLAY
§ [DVD- V] [DVD- A]
Angle
Metoda
mirne slike.
Sli
de Show:
Prikazuje
prema
redosljedu.
Change
t he number
za slike
odabir
an angle.
Page:
Odabire broj slike(stranice).
Audio
channel [HDD]
[-RW‹VR›]
[VCD] and DivX
≥
RANDOM:
Svira[RAM]
slučajnim
odabirom.
≥
Return:
Prikazuje slideshow kako je tvornički disku.
➡ 36, Changing audio during play
PBC (Play
ba ck
cont rol[DVDstranica
68) [VCD]
STILL-P
(Still
picture)
A]
Selects
Prikazuje
thedali
play
je method
playbackfor
kontrola
still pictures.
uključena ili isključena.
S lide Show : Plays according to the default order on the disc.
§ Mož
ete koristiti menije(stranica
na disku
za mjenjanje
Page:
Select the st ill31)
picture
number
and play.opcija
≥RANDOM: Plays in random order.
Return:
Returns
to theako
default
still picture
on the
disc.
≥
Ove≥
opcije
ne mož
ete mijenjati
ne snimate
nikakav
sadrž
aj
na
disk.
Source Sel ect (DivX)
Korištenje menija
Osnovne procedure
1
Pritisnite [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Picture
Sound
Other
Meni
Soundtrack
1
Î Digital 2/0 ch
Subtitle
Off
Audi o channel
LR
Opcija
≥Ovisno o stanju uređaja (reproducira se, st opirano, itd. ) i
sadržaju diska, postoje neke opcije koje se ne mogu
označiti.
2
3
4
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir menija i
pritisnite [►].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir opcije i
pritisnite [►].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir the
≥Neke opcije mogu biti podešene pritiskom na
[ ENTER] .
Čiš
ćenje ekrana
Pritisnite [DI SPLAY].
RQT841 5
42
≥Automatic:
The constructing method of the DivX contents
Audio
atributi
is autDTS/MPE
omat ically
LPCM/ PPCM/ÎDigital/
G:dis tinguished
Tip signalaand output .
k (kHz):
≥Interlace : Select when the disc cont
ent s were
recorded
Frekvencija
sempliranja
using interlace.
b (bit):
Broj bita
Broj
kanala
ch (channel):
≥Progressi ve: Select when the disc
cont
ents were recorded
using progressive.
Jezici
PBC (Playback control ➡ 81) [VCD]
ENG: English
SVE: Swedish
CHI: Chinese
menuNorwegian
play (playback control)
is on or off.
FRA:I ndicates
French whether NOR:
KOR: Korean
DEU: German
DAN: Danish
MAL: Malay
§ With s ome discs, you may only be able to make changes using the
ITA: Italian
POR: Portuguese
VIE: Vietnamese
menus
(➡ 35) on theRUS:
dis c. Russian
ESP:
Spanish
THA: Thai
NLD:
Dutch changes JPN:
Japanese
≥
The display
according
to the disc content
. You cannot
¢:
Others
change when t here is no recording.
Audio attri bute
LPCM/PPCM/ ÎDigital/ DTS /MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit ):
ch (channel):
Language
ENG: Eng lish
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dut ch
SVE:
NOR:
DAN:
PO R:
RUS:
JPN:
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bit s
Number of channels
Swedish
Norwegian
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
CHI:
KO R:
MAL:
VIE:
THA:
¢:
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
Thai
Others
Play
menu—Change
the
play sequence
Meni
slike—Mjenjanje
slike
This f unct ion wo rks only when t he elapsed play time is displayed.
Select
Reprodukcija
t he item forNR
repeat play. Depending on the disc, t he items that
can be selected will dif fer.
Reducira degradaciju slike.
Repeat Play
Progresivni § (stranica 68)
≥
All
[CD] [VCD]
≥
Chapter
[ RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Odaberite “ON” za[HDD]
prikaz
izlaza.
Odaberite “OFF” ako
[+RW]
je [DVD-V]
slika proš
[-RW‹VR›]
irena.
≥
Group
[DVD-A] and MP3
≥
PL (Play list)
[HDD] [ RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥
Tit le
[HDD] [ RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥
Track
[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
Select
Kada “Off”
je izlazni
to cancel.
signal PAL
≥
Auto:
Detektira 25 frame po sekundi i konvertira.
≥
Video:
je video sadržaj izoblič
en
Picture menu—Change
picture
Odaberite the
kod koriš
tenja quality
“Auto”, i kada
Play meni-mijenjanje
Sound
menu—Changeredosljeda
the soundsviranja
effect
Funkcija radi samo ako se prikazuje preostalo vrijeme.
V.S. S.
[ HDD]
[RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Play
sa ponavljanjem
[ -RW‹VR›]
All
(Dolby≥
Digital,
MPEG, 2-channel
[VCD] [CD]or(osim
overMP3
only)diskova)
≥
Chapter
[RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-V]
Enjoy
a surround-like effect if you are using t wo front speakers
≥
Group
[DVD-A] [ CD] (MP3 samo diskovi)
only.
≥
PL (Play list)
[RAM]
≥
Turn V.S. S. off if it causes
distortion. (Check the surround
Title
[RAM] [DVD-R]
[DVD-V]
f≥
unct
ion on the connected
equipment
.)
≥
Track
] [VCD] [CD]
≥
V. S.S. does not work[DVD-A
for bilingual
recordings.
DialogOdaberite
Enhancer
OFF za poništavanje.
[ HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[ -RW‹VR›] and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Other menu—Change the display position
Pl ayback NR
Kada je izlazni signal NTSC
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
≥
Auto1
P rogressi
ve§ (➡ 81) Detektira 24 frame po sekundi i konvertira.
(normal):
Kompatibilno sa 30 frame-po sekundi
≥
Auto2:
Select
“O n” to enable
kao progressive
i sa 24 f rame-po
out put .sekundi. (Može
doćiuredo
izoblič
enja
slike,ovisno o
Select “O ff” if the pict
is stret
ched
horizontally.
sadržaju)
Transfer§ [When “Progressive”
above)
is set
to “On”.
]
Odaberite (➡
kada
koristite
“Auto1”
i “Auto2”,
≥
Video:
i video sadrž
aj je ometan.
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
t he type of title being played (➡ 81, Film and video).
AV-in
NRt he
(Samo
u AV1,
AV3 ili AV4 modeu)
When
out put
signalAV2,
is PAL
(When the t ray is opened, the setting will return t o “Aut o”.)
Position
1–5: The higher t he settin g the lower t he on-screen menu
moves.
Statusne poruke
Pritisnite [STATUS].
Za prikaz promjena,pritisnite gumb
≥Auto:
Automatically detects the f ilm and video
≥
Automatic: Radi samo za reduckiju slike kod video
content, and appropriately converts it.
ulaza.
≥Video:
Select
when using “Auto”, and the content is
≥
On:
Redukcija radi na ulazni audio.
dist
orted.
≥
Off:
Redukcija buke je isključ
ena.
≥Film:
Select thi s if t he edges of
the film content appear
§ Samo kada je “Progress ive” postavljen na “On” u SETUP me niju
jagged or rough when
(stranica 20).
“Aut o” is select ed.
However, if the video
Zvučni meni-efekti
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration t o the right, then select
o”.
V.S. S. [RAM] [DVD-R]“Aut
[DVD-V]
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-kanala)
When the output signa l is NTS C
Uživajte u kopiji surround zvuka na 2 kanala.
≥Auto1
Automat ically detect s the film and video
≥
Isključit e V.S.S. ako uzrokuje distorziju.
(normal):
content, and appropriat ely converts it .
≥
V.S.S. ne radi na bilingual snimkama.
≥Auto2:
In addit ion t o “Auto1”, automat ic ally detect s
film contents with different fram e rat es and
appropriately converts it.
≥Video:
Select when using “Auto1” and “Aut o2”, and
Di alog Enhance r [DVD-A]
the content
[DVD-V]
is dist orted.
HDD
REC
PLAY
STEREO
LR
DVD REC
Odabrani disk
Preostalo vrijeme se prikazuje kada je
uređaj stopiran .
Snimanje kanala
Prijemni audio (NICAM ili MONO)
Odabrani tipa audia
Drive snimanja/
Broj prođenog vremena tijeko mreprodukcije
Mode snimanja
Dostupno vrijeme za snimke
Vrijeme i datum
πRemain
18:53:50 11.10.
πT1
0:05.14 XP
πT2
13:50 XP
0:00.10 XP
Prođeno vrijeme tijekom reprodukcije/snimanja
(Dolby Digital, 3-kanala,uključ
uju ć
i srednji)
AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise while copying.
Nema displaya
Jač
ina tona na centralnom zvu č
niku se pojač
ava,za jasnije
sluš
anje dijaloga.
≥
Automatic:
Noise reductio n only works on picture input from
a video tape.
≥
On: meni—Promjena
Noise reduction
works displaya
for inpu t video.
Ostali
pozicije
≥Off:
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input
signal as it is.
§
Pozicija
Only
when you have set “Progressive” t o “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 22).
1–5: Povećana vrijednost,to se sporije meniji pomi č
u
RQT8415
43
Editiranje titlova/poglavlja
CH
DRII V E
SELEC T
DRIVE SELECT
Tijekom
playa
ili kada
je uređaj stopiran
11 Duri
ng pl ay
or whi
le stopped
VOLUM E
AV
D VD
TV
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
PAG E
1 2 3
4 5 6
DVD DRIVE SELECT SD/PC
7 8 9
1
2
03 CH
DIRECTTVREC
CH
AV
DVD
INPUT
SELECT
4
SKI P
5
6
7
8
9
DELETE
VIDEOPlus+
;
1
PAUS EMANU AL SKIP
PLAY/x1.3
CANCE L STOP INPUT SELECT
0
 
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
DIREKTNA
3,4,2,1
NAVIGACIJA
ENTER
SUB MENU
[HDD] [RAM]
2
33
ShowVii ew
SLO W/SEARCH
:, 9
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2
VOLUM E
CH
DIRECT N AVIGATOR
VIDEO
STO P
PAUSE
008
007

PL AY/x1.3
Title Vi ew
007
SLOW/SEARCHPROG /CHECK
SKIP
TITLE VIEW
DIRECT N AVIGA TOR
HDD
HDD

ENTER FUNCTIONS
---
- --
ARD 11.10. SAT
- --
Pre vious
SU B MENU
RETURN
S
ENTER
F
CREAT E
CHAPTER
Next
Previous
Next
Next
Page 02/02
Prikaz SUB
ostalih
MENU stranica
Select Previous
MANU AL SKII P
ERAS E REC MODE
REC
4
45
B
Chapter
Start
End
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
[RAM] [DVD-R]
sectio
n between the division points becomes a chapter.
(➡ 36, 45, Create Chapter)
Naslov/poglavlje
Tit le
Programi se snimaju kao jedna pjesma
.
Chapt er
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Naslov
N ext
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
CREATE
Programmes are recordedEXTas
title consisting of one
LINK a single
CHAPTER AUDIO
chapter.
Title
A
C
Select
ENTER
TOP MENU
TIMER
-- -
Page 02/02
S SUB MENU
ENTER
5
Title View screen
PICTURE
- ----
Previous
DIRECTNAVIGATOR
PICTURE
VIDEO
008
-- -
ARD 10.10. FRI
-- -
“Red”
SUB MENU
RETURN
REC
REC MOD E EX T LIIN K DIRECT TV REC
POVRATAK
POD MENi
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
ROG/CHECK DISPL AY
STATU S TIMESLIP
(You cannot edit finalized Pdiscs.)
Title/Chapter
Pritisnite “Crveni”
gumb
za odabir
Pritisnite
the “Red”
button
za
“VIDEO”.
odabir
Pritisnite [] za odabir titla.
“VIDEO”.
Pritisnite
[▼▲, 2,
1] za odabir the
Title View ekran
ToPritisnite
show other
[]
pages
za odabir “Previous” ili “Next” i
Pritisnite
Više editiranja
[▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir “Previous” or “Next”
and pritisnite [ENTER] .
Odaberite
sa [
] i pritisnite
[]. (Repeat.)
≥
You can also
pritisnite
[:, 9]
to show other pages.
Pojavljujeediting
se oznaka. Pritisnite [] za
Multiple
poništavanje.
Select with [▼▲, 2, 1] and pritisnite [;].
(Repeat.) A check mark appears. Pritisnite [;]
Pritisnite
again to cancel.
[SUB MENU].
Pritisnite
Pritisnite [SUB
[] MENU].
za odabir operacija i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir the
Za poč
etak reprodukcije Pritisnite
operation
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
and pritisnite
[ENTER].
Partial Era se
Erase
Pogledajte
≥
If you select
“Edit”, pritisnite
[▼▲] za“Title
odabir the operation
P roperties
Change Thumbnail
operations”.
and pritisnite [ENTER]. (➡ 45)
Edit
Cancel Protection
Refer to “Title
Par tial Delete
Delete
Premješ
tanje na Direct operations”
Table Display
Chan geThumbnail
Proper ties
Navigator stranica 30 (➡ 45).
Divide Title
Edit
Poglavlje
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
Start (➡ 46).
Kraj
playlist
≥
The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
Mož
ete razdije liti pjesmu u viš
e poglavlja . [RAM]
–Tit
les:
500
➡stranica 32 , 39, Izrada poglavlja)(
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per tit le
(Depends on the state
of recording.)
Naslov
[RAM] [-R] [- R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–Tit les:Chapter 99 ([+R]Chapter
[+R]DL] [+RW] 49
t it les)
Chapter
Chap ter
–Chapters: App rox. 1000 ([+ R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on t he state of recording .)
Chapter Vie w
Album View
6
∫
If you
select []
“Chapter View”
Pritisnite
za odabir poglavlja.
6
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
≥
Jednom obrisani,dijelovi diska se ne mogu vratiti u normalno
[Savjet]
Youstanje.
can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, et c.) recorded
programmes.
≥
Nemož
ete editirati tijekom reprodukcije
Preparation
≥
Turn on the television and select the appropriat e video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥
Turn the unit on.
≥
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir the drive containing t he
recorded title to be edited.
≥
[RAM] Release protectio n (➡ 60).
RQT841 5
44
DIRECT NAVIGA TO R CHAPTER VIEW
Chapter Vi ew screen
Pritisnite [▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir the
chapter.
VIDEO
PICTURE
HDD
001
-- -
---
---
-- -
---
---
0:31.24
-- -
To start pl ay ➡ Pritisnite
DIRECT N AVIGATOR Chapter Vi ew
HDD
7
[Note]
≥
Once
delet
ed, divided
or partially
deleted,
recorded
content cannot
Mož
ete promijeniti
redosljed
poglavlja
i sastaviti
playlistu
be (stranica
re stored 40).
to its[RAM]
original st ate. Make certai n before proceeding.
≥
You cannot edit durin g recording or copying, etc.
≥
Pjesme rec
su podijeljene
na 5-minutna
poglavlja,nakon
finaliziranja
≥
Restricted
ording information
remains
even af ter editing
(e.g.
(stranica
[DVD-R]
div iding
a t it le52).
etc).
≥
[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the in formation is saved to t he
free
≥
Maksimalni
space onbroj
theobjekata
disc . If you
na disku:
do this numerous t imes, the amount
of–Titles:
free space decreases.
99
We
recommendOko
that1000
you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
–Poglavlja:
Swit ching the Direct Navigator
appearance ➡ 34
Playing still pictures ➡ 40, step 3
Displa y
∫
Ako steTable
odabrali
“Chapter View”
VIDEO
PICTURE
Chapter View screen
Pritisnite [SUB MENU], potom [] za
odabir operacije i pritisnite [ENTER].
008 ARD 11.10. SAT
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:31.24
---
---
≥
To show
other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)
Create Chapter
7
Pogledajte “Chapter
Pritisnite [SUBoperations”.
MENU], then [▼▲] to
Combine
Chapte
rs
select the operation
39).
and pritisnite
[ENTER].
≥
mož
ete otić
i naTitle View.
Create Chapter
Izlaz iz ekrana
Combine
Chapters
Refer to “Chapt er
operat ions” (➡ 45).
Title Vi ew
Pritisnite [DIRECT
NAVIGATOR].
≥You can go back to Title View.
To return to the previous screen
Pritisnite [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Title
operations
Operacije
sa pjesmama
Af ter performing steps 1–5 (➡ 44)
§
Brisanje
Delete
[RAM]
[DVD-R]
[HDD]
[RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Properties
[RAM] [DVD-R]
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Pritisnite
[2,
1]za
za odabir
odabir “Delete”
and
pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite
[]
“Erase”
i pritisnite
[ENTER].
≥
Once
deleted,
thesadrž
recorded
lo st and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥
Jednom
obrisani
aji secontents
ne mogu are
vratiti.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL , +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Avai lable recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
Prikazuju
se ted.
informacije
o disku.
P roperties
title is dele
It does not
increase if other titles are deleted.
Dinosaur
Information (e.g. , time and date) is shown.
≥Pritisnite [ENTER] to exit the screen.
Prope r ties
No.
26
Time
12:19
Date 11/10/2004 MO N Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Name Dinosaur
12
SELECT
Unos imena
[RAM] [DVD-R]
Enter
Name
Postavljanje
tite
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL]zaš
[-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Brisanje zaštite
§
Set
[RAM]up Protection
Cancel Protection§
Mo žete dati imena za snimlje ne pjesme.
➡stranica 42, Unos teksta
You can give names to recorded titles.
➡
63,
Enterin g text
Kod
postavljanja
se izbjegava mogućnost slučajnog brisanja pjesama.
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Možete obrisati než
eljene dijelove nsimke,kao npr.reklame.
The
lock symbol appears
when the title is protect ed.
Djelomič
no brisanje
[RAM]
Partial Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rectime 0:30 (SP)
Name ARD
DIRECT NAVIG AT OR
DVD-RAM
Pritisnite [] odaberite “Yes” i pritisnite
07
IfPrikazuje
set, this se
willsimbol
prot ectlokota
the t itako
le from
accident
al deletion.
je zaš
tićena pjesma.
DIRECT N AVIGATOR
DVD-RA M
Pritisnite [ENTER] za početak i kraj
1 Pritisnite
[ENTER]
at theobrisati.
start point and end point of
dijela kojeg
želite
the
2section
Pritisnite
you want
[]
to delete.
za odabir “Exit” pritisnite
2 Pritisnite
[▼▲]
za
odabirt o“Exit”
and
pritisnite
≥
Select
“Next”
and
pritisnite
[ENTER]
delet e ot
her sections.
[ENTER].
Change Thumbnail
Mjenjanje
slikica
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[RAM]
[DVD-R]
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[+RW]
(➡ below, For your reference)
[RAM]
BBC 11/10
008
--
- -
Partial
ARDErase
10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.
VIDEO PICTURE
08
PLAY
Start
End
008
VIDEO
Next
PLAY
PICTURE
Exit
Star t
End
0:43.21
Next
Sta rt
End
- -:- -. - -
- -:- -. --
Exit
0:43.21
ENTER
RETURN
Sta rt
End
--:- -.- -
--:- -.- -
ENTER
RETURN
You can change an image to be shown as t he t humbnail picture in t he Title
View.
Možete promijeniti pozadinu u meniju
1 Pritisnite [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2 Pritisnite
Pritisnite
[ENTER]
[] (PLAY)
when theza
image
reprodukciju.
you want to use as
a
Pritisnite
[ENTER] kada želite sliku
thumbnail
is shown.
1
2
Restart
play and pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Change”, then pritisnite
postaviti.
[ENTER]
at the
point you want to change.
Pritisnite[]
za odabir “Exit” pritisnite
Divide Title
[HDD]
[RAM]
Cijepanje
titla
(➡ below, For your reference)
Title V
BBC10/10 FRI
007
DIRECT N AVIG ATOR P artial Delete
HDD
3 Pritisnite
≥
Odaberite
[2,
“Next”
1]i pritisnite
za odabir
[ENTER]
“Delete”
za brisanje
and
selekcije.
pritisnite
[ENTER].
Pritisnite[] za odabir “Erase” pritisnite [ENTER].
3
08
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Yes” and pritisnite
[ENTER].
1
TITLE
3
3 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Exit” and pritisnite
You can
divide a tit le int o two.
[ENTER].
1
Pritisnite [ENTER] at the point you want to divide the
Mo žete podijeliti titl u dva dijela.
title.
2
[▼▲]za
zadio
odabir
“Exit”
and pritisnite
1Pritisnite
Pritisnite [ENTER]
koji ž
elite podijeliti.
[ENTER].
2 Pritisnite [] za odabir “Exit” pritisnite [ENTER].
3
[2, odaberite
1] za odabir
“Divide”
and pritisnite
3Pritisnite
Pritisnite []
“Divide”
pritisnite
[ENTER].
[ENTER].
Potvrda dijeljenja
DIRECT N AVIGATOR Chan geThumbnail
HDD
DIRECT N AVIGATOR Chan geThumbnail
DVD-RAM
008
;
;
08
VIDEO
PICTURE
VIDEO PICTURE
Chang e
Change
Exit
Exit
0:00.00
0:06.45
Chan ge
--:- -.- Change
0:06.45
Star t pla y and select the image
of a thumbnail.
ENTER
DIRECT N AVIG ATOR
HDD
Divide Title
008
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
PLAY
Divide Title
DVD- R AM
08
PLAY
VIDEO
PICTURE
Pre view
VIDEO PICTURE
Divide
Preview
Divide
Exit
0:43.21
Exit
0:43.21
Pritisnite
[] za
“Preview”
To confirm
theodabir
divi sion
point pritisnite [ENTER]. (Uređaj svira 10
Sekundi
prije[▼▲]
i nakon mjesta
dijeljenja.)
Pritisnite
za odabir
“Preview” and pritisnite [ ENTER]. (The unit
Restartmjesta
play and
pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Divide”, then pritisnite [ENTER] at the point where you want
Promjena
dijeljenja
to divide
Ponovite
play [ za odabir “Divide”, pritisnite [ ENTER] na mjestu gdje želite promjenu.
the title.
Div ide
- -:- -. - -
ENTER
[Savjet]
§
Mult ipl e editing is possible.
[Note]
≥
Promijenjeni titlovi zadržavaju isto ime CPRM (➡stranica 51) kao originalni titl.
≥The divided t it les ret ain t he title name and CPRM propert y (➡ 81) of t he original title.
≥Video and audio just before and aft er the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
Chapter operations
Operacije s poglavljima
Af ter performing steps 1–7 (➡ 44)
§
Delete
Chapter
Brisanje
poglavlja
[HDD]
[RAM][RAM]
Stvaranje poglavlja
[RAM]
Create
Chapter
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your referenc e)
Pritisnite
[]
“Erase”
i pritisnite
[ENTER].
Pritisnite
[2,
1]za
za odabir
odabir “Delete”
and
pritisnite [ENTER].
≥
Jednom
obrisani
žaji secontents
ne mogu are
vratiti.
≥
Once
deleted,
thesadr
recorded
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
.
≥
Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapt ers.
1
Pritisnite [ENTER] u dijelu kojeg želite
Select t he point where you want t o st art a new chapter while viewing the
title. podijeliti.
1 Pritisnite
≥Ponovite[ENTER]
korake za sve
at the
dijelove.
point you want to divide.
≥
Repeat this st ep to divide at other points.
2
DIR EC T N AVIGA TOR
D VD- RAM
DIRECT08
NA VIGAT OR
HDD
00 8
Pritisnite [] odaberite “Exit”i pritisnite
2 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Exit” and pritisnite
[ENTER].
[ENTER].
Create Chapter
VIDEO PICTURE
Create
Chapter Create
PLAY
VIDEO
PICTURE
PLAY
Create
Exit
0:43.21
Exit
0:43.21
Combine
Chapters
Kombiniranje
poglavlja Pritisnite [] odaberite “Combine” pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite
[2, 1]i sljedeć
za odabir
“Combin e” and
[HDD]
[RAM][RAM]
≥
Odabrano poglavlje
e se kombiniraju
.
§
Mult iple editing is possible.
For your reference
Brzosearch
editir anje
≥Use
(➡ 35), Time Slip (➡ 36) to find the desired point .
Time correctly,
Slip ili slow-motion
(stranica(➡
31)36)
zaand
traženje
željenog dijela.
≥T≥
oKoristite
find thepretragu,
desired point
use Slow-motion
Frame-by-frame
(➡ 36).
≥
Pritisnite [] za preskakanje na kraj poglavlja.
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, pritisnite [:] (start ) or [9] (end).
pritisnite
RQT8415
45
Izrada,editiranje i reprodukcija playlista
DRII VE
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
V OLUME
CH
AV
3
Pritisnite [] za odabir “Playlists” id
pritisnite [ENTER].
4
Pritisnite [] za odabir “Create”
and pritisnite [ENTER].
PAGE
2
5
8
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
CH
Show Viiew
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
SL OW/SEARC H
Playlists
HDD
Playlist Vie w
--
ST OP
PAUSE
--
--
--
--
PLAY/x 1.3
Create
PROG//CHECK
FUNCTIONS
ENTE R

ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
CREAT E
CHAPTE R
Poglavlje
5
Pritisnite [] za odabir željene
datoteke
≥
Pritisnite [ENTER] za odabir poglavlja i krenite na korak 7.
RETUR N
RETURN
S
MANU AL SKII P
Mož
etepreureditipoglavlja (➡ 44) izrada playlista.
Title
Poglavlje
--
Poglavlje
Create
Playlists
HDD
Title
Poglavlje
Poglavlje
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002
---
So urce Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
Pag e 001/001
002
Chapters in Pl aylist
-----
ENTER
RETURN
Playlist
Poglavlje
Poglavlje
Pa g e 001/001
---
S SUB MENU
Pa g e 001/001
Pritisnite RETURN to
e xit.
6
Pritisnite [] za odabir poglavlja
kojeg želite dodati u playlistu i pritisnite
[ENTER].
Kopiranje (➡ 51).
Create
Playlists
HDD
≥
Playliste se ne snimaju posebno,i ne zauzimaju puno prostora.
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002
≥
Editiranje poglavlja ne utječe na sami izgled datoteka na disku
.
Pa g e 001/001
---
---
Source Chapter
Pag e 001/001
002
001
Chapters in Pl aylist
-----
ENTER
RETURN
S SUB MENU
003
---
---
---
Pa g e 001/001
Pritisnite RETURN to
e xit.
7
Pritisnite [] za odabir pozicije za
unos poglavlja i pritisnite [ENTER].
Izrada playliste
Pla ylists
HDD
[HDD] [RAM]
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Sou rce Title
001
Sou rce Chapter
001
≥
Maknite zaštitu za kartice (➡ stranica 60).
ENTER
RETURN
1
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Playback
ShowView Record
Recording
A dvanced Co py
Pl aylists
Delete
Flexible Rec
Copy
DV Auto Rec
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
46
---
Pa ge 001/001
002
003
---
Pa g e 001/001
---
---
---
Pritisnite RETURN to
e xit.
.
8
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Dok je uređaj stopiran.
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
2 Pritisnite [] za odabir “To
Others”i pritisnite [ENTER].
RQT841 5
---
Chapters in Pl aylist
---
≥
Pritisnite [ DVD] za odabir DVD-a.
Pag e 001/001
002
Setup
HDD Management
Povratak na prijaš
nji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta.
Editiranje
i reprodukcija
playlista
Editing
and
playing playlists/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Reprodukcija)
[-RW‹VR›]
(Play only)
11
Playlist
operations
Operacije
playliste
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
§
§
Delete
Brisanje
Whi
le stopped
Dok je uređaj stopiran
[HDD ] [RAM]
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
2 Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir “To
2 Pritisnite [, ] za odabir “To
Others”
and pritisnite [ENTER].
Others”
3 Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir “Playlists
i pritisnite [ENTER].
and playlist.
playlist.
Opcije
Properties
[HDD ] [RAM]
[- RW‹VR›]
- -
Playlists
HDD
5
5
Playlist View screen
Playlist View
--
12.10. SUN 0:30
Create
--
--
Kopiranje
Pritisnite [] za odabir “Copy” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
§
Copy
Mijenjanje
--
[HDD
] [RAM]
pozadine
] za odabir opercija i
Change
Thumbnail
Dodavanje
Enter Name
Delete
Chan ge Thumbnail
Proper ties
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
Add
Chapter
CHAPTER VIEW
Izrada
Move
poglavlja
HDD
---
To start play ➡ Pritisnite
[E NTE R]. To edit ➡ S tep 7.
0:10.24
---
-- -
Chapter
-- -
Chapter View screen
Chapter View
Kombiniranje
Poglavlja
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
Pritisnite [SUB MENU], potom [, ] za
Odabir operacije i pritisnite
002
---
stranica 40, Creating play lists,Koraci 4–6
---
---
---
---
0 01
00
2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Previous
Brisanje
poglavlja
≥
[ENTER].
To show other pages/ Mul tipl e editing (➡ 44)
RETURN
stranica 39, izrada poglavlja
Pritisnite [▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir the
posi tion to inser t the chapter and
M ove
Chapter
stranica 39,
Kombiniranje
poglavlja
Playlists
HDD
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
001
Pritisnite
Move Chapter [SUB MENU], then
Pogledajte “Chapter
operations”.
[▼▲] to
Create Chapter
select the operation and pritisnite
Combine Chapters
[ENTER].
.
≥
Mož
etesevratitina PLAYLIST View.
Combine Chapters
002
operations”.
Delete Chapter
Izlaziz
ekrana
Izlaz
iz ekrana
Playlist View
Pritisnite
[RETURN]
nekoliko
puta.puta.
Pritisnite
[RETURN]
nekoliko
---
---
0:19.36
--Stranica 39, Brisanje poglavlja
---
---
---
---
Previous
7
Next
ENTER
0:10.24
---
Add
Chapter
Create
Chapter
01/01
➡ 46, Creatin g pl aylists , St ep 5–7
0:19.36
---
Move Chapter
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left )
≥Edi ting chapters in a playlist does not modif y the source titles and
source chapters.
poglavlja.
-- -
➡ 45, Change Thumbnail
Micanje
unos poglavlja,pritisnite [ENTER].
poglavlja operations
Chapter
Pritisnite [▼▲, 2,
1] za
Chapter View ekran
odabir the chapter.
-- -
Pritisnite
[2, 1] za odabir “Copy” and
stranica3 9, Mijenjanje pozadine
pritisnite
[ENTER].
≥one
The cinopied
playlistview
becomes
the newest
the playlist
screen.
01 12/10 SU N 0:30
6
0:10.24
stranica 53, Unos teksta
PLAY LIST
DVD -RAM
Pritisnite
[]
za odabir
∫
If you
select “Chapter
View”
001
➡
46, Creating playlists, St ep 5–8
Dajete ime playlisti.
Multiple editing is possible.
Pritisnite[] za odabir pozicije za
Chapter Vi ew
7
RETURN
poglavlja
§
Edit
Playlists
HDD
ENTER
[HDD ] [RAM]
P roperties
002
Date 12.10.2006 TUE
Total 0:30.53
[HDD
] [RAM]
Editiranje poglavlja ne utje če na sam sadržaj diska.
Enter Name[▼ ▲] za odabir the operat ion
≥
I f you select
“Edit”, pritisnite
Erase
“Playlist
and pritisnite [ENTER].
operations”.
001
10
Chapters 002
You c an give names to playlists.
Enter
➡ 63, Entering t ext
Operacije
poglavlja
Name
select the operation and pritisnite
[ENTER].
Pogledajte
PL AYLISTS
RETURN
stranica 40, Izrada playliste No.
[HDD
] [RAM]
Ime
Pritisnite [SUB MENU], potom [, ]
za
operacije
i pritisnite
≥
To odabir
show other
pages/Mul tipl
e editi ng (➡ 44)
≥
Ako odaberete “Edit”, pritisnite [,
pritisnite [ENTER ].
6
ENTER
--
Pritisnite
[ENTER]. [SUB MENU], then [▼▲]
to
SELECT
Izrada
Create
Unesite
--
01
Dinosaur
10
Date
12/10/2004
Playlist in formation (e. No.
g., total
t ime
andTUEdate)
Chapters 002
Total 0:30.53
is shown.
≥Pritisnite [ENTER] t o exit the screen.
Prope r ties
To start pl ay ➡ Pritisnite
[E NTER].
To
edi t ➡ S tep 5.
01
Pritisnite
1]za
zaodabir
odabir“Erase”
“Del ete” and
Pritisnite [2,
[,]
pritisnite
[ENTER].
[ENTER].
Once
deleted,
the playl ists are lost and
Informacije
playliste.
cannot be restored.
Pr operties
Make certain before proceeding.
---
---
Pag e 01/01
---
Ne xt
ENTER
RETURN
Create
Chapter
➡ 45, Create Chapter
Combine
Chapters
➡ 45, Combine Chapters
Delete
Chapter§
➡ 45, Delete Chapter
The playlist itsel f is deleted if you delete all
t he chapters in it.
≥
You can go back to Playlist View.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
To return to the previous screen
Povratak[RETURN]
na prijašnji.ekran
Pritisnite
ToPritisnite
exit the [RETURN].
screen
Pritisnite [RETURN] several times.
RQT8415
47
Editing still pictures
Editiranje mirne slike
21
2
DV D
TV
VOLUM E
CH
DIRECTTV REC
AV
DV D
TV
DVD, SD/PC
DVDÍ
DRIVE SELECT
Í SD/PC
DRIVE SELECT
DRII VE
SELECT
1
2
CH
3
VOLUM E
AV
CH
4
5
6
3
3
PAG E
1 2 VIDEOPlus+
3
7
8
9
CANCEL 4
INPUTSELECT
5 MANUAL6SKIP
0
ShowVii ew
8SLO W/SEARCH
9
SKIP7
DELET E
0 PLAY/x1.3
STO P
PAUSE
4
CH
SKII P
SL OW/SEARC H
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
PAUSE
STO P
PLAY/x1.3
PROG /CHECK
ENTER
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
POD MENI
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
;
 
ENTER
DPOF
To show other pages
Pritisnite [▼▲,
2, 1] za odabir “Previous” or “Next”
str 29
Slide Interval
and pritisnite [ENTER] .
≥
You can also pritisnite [:, 9] to show other
∫
Editiranje
mapa za mirne slike
pages.
Ukoraku 3
Multiple editing
EraseWhole Folder
1 Pritisnite
Select
[with

[▼▲,
] za odabir
2, 1]
“Fol
and
der”
pritisnite
i
[;]. Folder Name
pritisnite [E NTER].
≥
To swi tch to another higher folder (➡ 41) Set up Protection
2 Pritisnite [ ] za odabir mape.
Cancel Protection
≥
Zaprikazostalih stranica (➡stranica 32) DPOF
3 Pritisnite
[SUB ME[▼▲]
NU], potom []
za
Pritisnite
za odabir
the
odabir operacije,nakon toga [E NTER].
Start Slide Sho w
SUB MENU
RETURN
POVRATAK
ENTE R
PR OG/CHECK DISPLAY
STATUS
TIME SLIP
SUB MEN U
RETURN
S
CRE AT E
CHAPTER
[RAM] [SD] [PC]“Green ”
REC
REC MODE
RETURN
MANUA L SKIIP
EXT LIIN K DIRECT TV REC
Priprema
AUDIIodabir.
O STA TUS DISPLAY TIIME SLII P
≥
Pritisnite [ DVD] ili [ SD/PC] za
≥
Uklonite zaštitu ( stranica 50).
1
≥Prikaz ostalih stranica (
[SUB MENU].
≥Odabir mirne slike u drugoj mapi
≥
When you want t o create an album us ing “Create Album”,
pritisnite [SUB[SUB
MENU] without
selecttada
ing album.
Pritisnite
MENU],
[] za
picture to edit and pritisnite [ENTER].
Picture
2Erase
Select
the still pictures to edit and
Set up Protection
ispod
pritisnite
Cancel Protection
FUNCTIONS
TOP MENU
Pritisnite [] za odabir
Pritisnite thepritisnite
“Green”[ENTER].
button za
“PICTURE”
odabir
Pritisnite
[] za odabir mirne
“PICTURE”.
slike.
Select the albu m to be edited and pritisnite
Odabir
operacije
i pritisnite
Editin g a sti
ll picture:
1 Select the album which contains the still
[ENTER].
INPUT
SELECT
:, 9
DIREKTNA
NAVIGACIJA
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[RAM]
[HDD] [RAM]
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
4
operation
∫
To edit the album
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
(e.g., [SD])
Povratak na prethodni ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Start Slide Show
Slide Sh ow Setting
Usef ul functions during st ill picture
play (➡ 41)
Upozorenje:
Slike daljinskog urpavljača se mogu razlikovati od aktualnog
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥
You can edit pictures and albums.
≥
You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥
You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R and CD-R/ CDRW.
Preparation
≥
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir the HDD, DVD or SD
drive.
≥
[RAM] [SD] Release protectio n ( 60, Settin g the protection).
Add Pictures
Enter Album Name
Create
Album
Delete
Alb um
modela,ali funkcionalnost
je ista.
Edit Album
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Select Folder
Album and picture operation (➡ 49)
[RAM] [SD]
This is only displayed when there are ot her higher
folders that can be viewed.
To switch to anot her higher folder (➡ 41)
∫
To edit still picture
(e. g., [SD])
Delete Picture
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Album and pic ture operation
(➡ 49)
DPOF
Album View
You can go back to Album View.
Povratak na prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
RQT841 5
48
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Album
and sa
picture
operation
Operacije
slikom/mapama
Af ter performin g st eps 1–4, page 48
Brisanje
slika§
Delete
Picture
§
Brisanje
mapa
Delete
Album
[RAM]
[SD] [SD]
[PC]
[HDD]
[RAM]
Enter
Album Name
Zaštita
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Micanje zaštite §
Set
up
[RAM]
[SD]Protection
[PC]
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
DPOF
[SD] [PC]
DPOF
§
[SD]
Pritisnite[2,
[]
za odabir
odabir “Erase”
[ENTER].
Pritisnite
1] za
“Delete”pritisnite
and pritisnite
[ENTER].
≥
Kada
jednom
obri
šete,ne
mo žete vratiti
podatke.
≥Once
deleted,
the
record
ed contents
are l ost
and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
≥When deleting an album, f iles other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This
does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)
YouAko
canjegive
names to albums.
prisutna ova zaštita ne možete slučajno obrisati
➡ 63, Enterin
g text
≥Album names input using this unit may not be dis played on other equipment.
DIRECT N AVIG ATOR
I f set,
this willseprotect
still pict ure or al bum from accidental deletion.
Prikazuje
simbolthe
lokota.
≥
Ova mapa može biti obrisana na drugom uređaju
Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Yes” and pritisnite
PIC
SD CARD
Pritisnite [] za odabir “Yes” pritisnite [ENTER].
Folder
103__
0001NAVIGATOR
0002
DIRECT
Pic
SD CARD
Al bum Name0006 103__
0005
[ENTER].
≥Even if the protection set ting is used by this unit to prot ect an album, the al bum
0001
0002
0005
0006
Mož
eteodabraticijelumapu,ilisamoodređ
enedijelovezaispis.
may be deleted by another unit .
Pritisnite [] za broj printanja (0 do 9)
You can select individual pictures for print ing and specif y the number of prints to be made.
DPO
F
Set up DPOF onthe picture (JPEG).
Setting onother equipment
DPOF will be cancelled.
Pritisnite
1] za odabir number of print (0 to 9) and
pritisnite[2,
[ENTER].
DPOF znak s epojavljuje.
pritisnite
The DPO F mark appears.
[ENTER].
Number of prints
1
Set upDPOF on the picture (JPEG).
P otherENTER
Setting on
equipment will be cancelled.
Number of prints
1
Poniš
tavanje opcije
Podesite broj printa na “0”.
To ≥
cancel
the upisa,sve
pri nt settin
g
Kod ovog
promjene
sa drugih ure đaja se brišu.
Set the number of print to “0”.
Ime mape
[RAM]Pictures
[SD] [PC]
Add
Create Album
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Print settings (DPOF) made using this unit may not be viewa ble on other equipment .
≥When this is set by this unit, any settings established by other units will be released.
≥Set tings cannot be made for files not in accordance with DCF standards or if t here is no remaining space
dati Ime mapi.
onMož
theete
card.
➡stranica 42, unašanje teksta
1≥
Pritisnite
1]
za
“Start”
ordrugim
“Yes”
pritisnite [ENTER].
Imena mapa [2,
možda
neć
e bitiodabir
prikazana
ispravno na
ureand
đ
ajima.
e.g.,
Create Album
Step 1
2
3
4
Please select album to copy.
HDD
007
008
12.5.06 Total 24
100_DVD
- --
-- -
12.6.06 Total 3
101_DVD
- - -
- --
Previous
Page 02/02
ENTER
Next
Pr e vious
RETURN
N ext
2 Pritisnite [▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir the album that contains the still picture you
want
toe.g.,
add and pritisnite
Create Album[ENTER].
Copy all the pictures in the selected alb um?
Copy Pictures
Copy Album
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
[RAM] [SD]
To swit ch t o another higher folder
1 Pritisnite [SUB MENU].
2 Select “Select Folder” and pritisnite [ENTER] .
3 Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir the higher folder and pritisnite [ENTE R] .
3 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir the item and pritisnite [ENTER].
≥
If “Copy Pictures” is selected
Select the still picture you want to add and pritisnite [ENTER] .
≥
If “Copy Album” is selected
All the still pictures in t he album will be copied.
4 Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Yes” or “No” and pritisnite [ENTER].
≥
If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step ➁.
Onl y for “Create Album”
5 Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Yes” or “No” and pritisnite [ENTER].
≥
If “Yes” is select ed:
You can give names to albums. (➡ 63, Ent ering t ext)
≥
If “No” is selected:
The recording date of the f irst pict ure in the album becomes the album name. (I f there is no recording
date information, the date wil l appear as [--/--/--].)
Copy to DVD-RAM
Pritisnite [2] za odabir “Start” and pritisnite [ENTER].
[HDD]
You cannot copy if mult iple albums are selected.
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
§
Mult iple editing is possible.
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add Pictures”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
≥You cannot perform “Add Pictures” or “Creat e Album” t o a higher folder.
RQT8415
49
Brisanje
Korištenje
DELETENavigator
Navigatorto
zadelete
Using
the DELETE
brisanje
DVD
DRIVE
SELECT
1Priprema
While stopped
TV
Í
Í
CH
DRII VE
SELECT
V OLUM E
• Upalite
televizor i odaberite
odgovaraju ći ulaz.
Pritisnite
[FUNCTIONS].
• Upaliteuređ
aj.
Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir
• Umetnite
disk.
AV
2
and
1 Dok je uređaj stopiran
PAGE
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ShowVii ew
DELETE
SLO W/SEARCH
PAUS E
VIDEO
007
2
Pauza
PLA Y/x1.3
“Delete
pritisnite
Pritisnite [ENTER].
[FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Delete” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
HDD
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
ST OP
CH
008
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.S AT
-- -
---
Previous
ENTER
PROG//CHECK
- --
P age 02/02
S SUB MENU
PICTURE
- --
Select
Next
Pre vious
RETURN
Next
DELETE Navigator Title View
07
ARD
RETURN
S
CREAT E
CHAPTE R
“Red”
RETURN
MANU AL SKII P
RE C
REC MOD E EXT LIINK DIRECT TV REC
AUD I O
S TATUS DISPL AY TIIMESL IP
• RAM
Preparation
Kada je dio obrisan,prazan prostor će se povećati.
≥
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥
[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).
Dostupni prostor s epovećava,ako je bilo
što od ovoga obirsano.
∫
Available disc space after deleting
Zadnje
Dostupan
Title1
Title2
---snimljeno
prostor
≥
[HDD] [RAM ] [SD] If you dele te a recorded title (or a st ill pic ture),
• the
-RW(V)
space
+RW
delet ed becomes available for recording.
Prostor se povećava kada je obrisan zadnje snimljeni dio.
Available disc space increases after
deleting
any ofse
t hese
Dostupan
prostor
ne titles or stillKada je detektirano,prostor
pictures
poveć
ava ako je detektirano.
se povećava
Tit le
Title1
Title2 Title - - - -
......Zadnje
Last title
recorded
snimljeno
ARD
33
7. 5. SUN
--
ENTER
S SUB MENU
RETURN
--
Select
-R
-R DL
+R
Pritisnite [] za odabir “Previous” ili “Nex t” i pritisnite
4
IfPritisnite
you want to delete
a stiza
ll picture:
[►◄]
odabir
You can conftijekom
irm the tit lesreprodukcije
or pictures etc. that you have
Brisanje
1
selected using the sub menu.
≥
Refer to sub menu operations for the “Tit le View” (➡ 44, st ep
While playing
5).
Pritisnite
[DELETE].
≥
Refer t o sub menu
operations for t he “Album View” (➡ 48,
Delete
step 4).
DOCUMENTARY
To
other
Dateshow
7.5.2006
SUN pages
Time
19:41
Name
10 [:, 9] to show other pages.
Pritisnite
Dostupni prostor se ne povećava nakon brisanjaon.
≥
[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recordin g space increase s only when t he
last recorded title is deleted.
Title
Title
......
Last title
recorded
Available
di sc space
≥
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after t he cont ent s are dele ted.
“Delete” i
1 Pritisnite [▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir the
pritisnite
[ENTER].
album that contains the still picture you
Izlaziz ekrana
want to delete and pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Pritisnite [▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir
Povrataknaproš
li ekran
the still
picture and pritisnite
Pritisnite [RETURN].
[ENTER].
Available
Dostupan
disc space
prostor
Available disc space
increase s af ter deleting
0 -- 9
Next
Pritisnite
[▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir
[ENT ER].
Više editiranja
the
Odaberite sa [] i pritisnite []. (Repea t.) Pojavljuje
album
and pritisnitetavanje.
[DELETE].
se oznaka. Pritisnite [] za poniš
+R DL
Available disc space does
not increase even after
dele ting
No.
za odabir
Pritisnite [▲▼◄►]2,
za1]
odabir
pjesme i
the title
pritisnite
[ENTER].
and
pritisnite
[ENTER].
Prikazostalihstranica
Remaining Time
•
Previous
IfPritisnite
you want to delete
a ti tle:
[▼▲,
“Green”
[HDD]
RAM[RAM]
-R [-R]
-R[-R]DL]
DL -RW(V)
[-RW‹V›] +R
[+R] +R
[+R]DL]
DL [+RW]
+RW [SD]
(You
• Necannot
mo žete
delete
vratiti
items
obrisani
on finalized
dio. discs.)
≥
A titl e or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make
certain before proceeding.
≥
You cannot delete while recording or copying.
7. 5. SUN
--
ENTER
SU B MENU
--
[HDD] [RAM] To switch to the other view
Pritisnite the “Green” button za odabir
“PI CTURE”. Pritisnite the “Red” button za
odabir Previous
“VIDEO”.
Next
Page 02/02
FUNCTIONS
ENTE R
08
42
1:57(SP)
Multiple
Correspondingediting
chapter of playlists will be deleted.
Select with
2 , 1] and pritisnite [;] .
Delete[ ▼▲,
Cancel
SELECT
A check mark
appears. Pritisnite [;] agai n to
ENTER
RETURN
cancel.
Pritisnite[2]
[◄►]
za odabir
“Delete”
Pritisnite
za odabir
“Delete”
and
pritisnite [ENTER].
pritisnite
[ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Pritisnite [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Pritisnite [RETURN] several times.
Deleting titles or pictures during play
1
While playing
Pritisnite [DELETE].
You cannot delete a pict ure during a Slide Show.
2
Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Delete”
and
pritisnite [ENTER].
RQT841 5
50
Kopiranje titlova ili playlisti
[HDD] [RAM ] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
Mož
ete.odabrati razne nač
ine transfera
Copy
Easy copying from HDD t o DVD with no diff icult
set tings.
Advanced Copy
Make a copy list and then copy.
Features
You can set the unit to copy titles or pl aylists in the
way you want.
∫
Smjer transfera
HDD ➝ DVD
Y
Y
Kada želite editirati finalizirani
DVD disk.
Y
Copy direction
[RAM] [-RW‹ VR›] [+RW]
DVD ➝ HDD
t mode§1
High speed
Brza brzina
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalized disc)
HDD
DVD-R, etc. §2
HDD
Y
DVD-V§
H DD
RAM
[DVD-V] You cannot
perform
high-speed
copy wit h
Normal speed mode
brzina
§1
finalized discs.Normal speed mode
High speedNormalna
mode copy
Y
§ Finalizirani DVD -R, DVD-RW (DVD[+RW]
You cannot perform high-speed copy from
≥
Kada ž
elite reproducirati disk na drugom
+RWVideo
to HDD.
format) i +R ili DVD-Video koji
uređaju,morate ga finalizirati ( 52 , 68).
Brzo
nisu zaštićeni
Changing
recordi ng mode
t
Y§2
DVD-RW (DVD
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹
V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
§3
DD
Video Recording
FinalHize
Can be select ed
Automat ically finalized
format)
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Norm al speed mode
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures on
Y
t
t
t
an SD card (➡ 55)
] only
∫
Mode transfera§4
t
t
Y
Y
Copying playl ists
Transferring
(dubbing) titla ili playliste
Transfer više playlistiY
Are
chapters maintained?
Y
t §5
t §5
Are thumbnail s maintained?
Y
t §6
Y§7
t §6
§8
Recording
and
Playing
while
Copying
t
t
Y
t
One Touch Transfer (dubbing) ( 44)
Transfer koristećilistu transfera( 44)
To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 26).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
Mož
eteodabratibrzinutransfera
≥
Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording
modes
≥
Playlists
creatednosti
from multip le titles using FR recording mode
∫
Tipovi
i moguć
≥
Playlists mixed wit h a variety of audio types (Dolby
Digital and LPCM , et c.)
Brzo
Normal no (XP, SP, LP, EP, FR)
≥
Titles that contain many deleted segment s
U
LP
mode,
mož
ete snimiti oko 4
≥
MPEG2
moving
picture
titles
copied
to
the
HDD
from
an
SD
card
Mogućnosti
Mož
ete kopiratiukratkomvremenu.
Sata
na 1 (4.7
GB) disk
( 23).
≥
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Tit les recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours
or longer)
” mode
. (Displayed
)
§2 If you select a recording mode wit h better picture quality than the original, the pict ure quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of pic ture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
XP
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select ”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play
Select”
in “DVD Management” before copying (➡ 62).
LP LP LP
LP
§4
You cannot copy playlists with a pl ay time more t han 8 hours.
dolje
Ista količina vremena,kao i izvor
Vrijeme
When you copy a playlist, it wil
l bec
ome a title in the destination drive.
§5
[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One t it le becomes one chapter.
§1
Kvaliteta
slike
kvaliteta
Promjene[+R]
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] : Chapters ar eOriginalna
created automatically
([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes
about 8-minut es) when finalizing after copying t he disc.
§6 Thumbnails return to t he default
Da§2
posit ion.
Održavanje poglavlja
Ne
§7 When copyin g playlists, the thumbnails may not re flect change s made to them.
§8
Possible
only with
titles on t heMož
HDD
Ostale
operacije
dok
etekoristitiHDD.
Ne
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalization or when copying MPEG2 movin g pict ures on an SD card.)
kopirate
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, et c. while copying.
–You cannot play a pl aylist while copying titles with “One time only recording” res trict ion (➡ 8).
–Still pic tures cannot be pl ayed.
§1
∫
Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
∫
Vrijeme
(excludes
t imesnimanja
required to write dat a management information)
5X Speed
16X Speed
4X Speed
4X Speed §1
8X Speed§2
2.4X Speed
4X Speed
HDD
DV D-R DL
+R DL
DV D-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
+RW
8k brzinski Requi red
5k brzinski DVD-RAM
Required 8k brzinski
Required
DVD-R
4k
Required
brzinski DVD-RWRequired
Rec
Rec HDDRequired Speed Required
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
+R Speed
mode
time
ti me
ti me
time
time
ti me
time
time
Mode snimanja
Vrijeme
XP
15 min.
4x
15 min.
4x 8 min. 35 s. 7x
25 min. 2.4x
15 min.
4x
1 12 min. 5x 6 min.Oko.10x
XP
12 min.
Oko. 8.7 min.
Oko. 15 min.
Oko. 8.7 min.
SP
6 min.
10x 1
2 min. 25 s. 25x 7 min. 30 s. 8x 7 min. 30 s. 8x 4 min. 10 s. 14x 12 min. 30 s. 4.8x 7 min. 30 s. 8x
SP
Oko. 6 min.
Oko. 3.8 min.
Oko. 7.5 min.
Oko. 3.8 min.
LP
1 hour
3 min . 20x 1 min. 15 s. 48x 3 min. 45 s. 16x 3 min. 45 s. 16x 2 min. 25 s. 25x 6 min. 15 s. 7.2x 3 min. 45 s. 16x
LP
1 sat
Oko. 3 min.
Oko. 1.9 min.
Oko. 3.8 min.
Oko. 1.9 min.
EP (6H)
2 min.
30x
52 sec. 69x 2 min. 30 s. 24x 2 min. 30 s. 24x
EP (6 sati)
Oko. 2 min.
Oko. 1.3 min.
Oko. 2.5 min.
Oko. 1.3 min. EP
EP (8H)
1 min. 30 s. 40x
42 sec.
86x 1 min. 53 s. 32x
1 min. 53 s. 32x
(8 sati)
Oko. 1.5 min.
Oko. 56 sec.
Oko. 1.9 min.
Oko. 56 sec.
≥The above values indicate t he quickest possible t imes and speeds t o high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording c ompat ible disc . Depending on what part of t he disc is being writ ten to, the features of the disc, et c., the times and speeds will vary.
§1
In thi s unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the s ame spee d as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§2 In thi s unit, copying with a 16X Spe ed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximu m recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of t he disc, the unit may not copy using t he maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (singl e-sided, Dual Layer)
and +R DL (single-si ded, Doubl e Layer)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal spee d to the HDD and then copied at high speed
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The title s that were t emporarily copied t o
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
–When there is not enough f ree space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you int end to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.
When playin g a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 5)
Regardi ng copying of digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title t o a CPRM (➡ 81) compat ible DVDRAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cann ot be copied f rom DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 45).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only re cording” titles.
≥Titles with recording limit ations and playlist s cannot be registered
on t he same copying list.
RQT8415
51
Kopiranje titlova ili playlisti
3
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir
dijela kojeg želite kopirati i pritisnite
[ENTER].
PAGE
1
4
7
Brojčani
gumbi
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ShowVii ew
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
Premotavanje
CH
Više editiranja
Odaberite sa [▼▲]
Pritisnite [ENTER] za registraciju.
≥
Pojavljuje se oznaka..
SLO W/SEARC H
Pauza
■
STOP
PAUS E
►
PLAY/x1.3
PROG /CHECK
FUNCTIONS
4
ENTER
ENTER
SUB MENU
“Red”
SU B MENU
RETURN
RETURN
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUA L SKII P
REC
REC MODE EX T LIIN K DIRECTT V REC
AUD I O
STATU S DISPLAY TIIME SLII P
“Green”
STATUS
∫
Brzina i modeovi snimanja kod kopiranja
[HDD] > [RAM] : High speed
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the follo wing table.
Snimanje za velike brzine (➡ 66)
Brzina kopiranja
Samo titlovi snimljeni sa “Rec for High
Speed Copy” podeš
eni na “On”.
Velika brzina
Samo titlovi snimljeni sa“Rec for High
Speed Copy” podešeni na “Off”.
Kod aranžiranja više opcija koje
su snimljene sa “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set na “On” i “Off”.
Normalna brzina
Nakon što ste počeli kopirati DV D-R, DV D-R DL, DV DRW (DVD- Video format), +R i +R DL diskove, oni
postaju samo za čitanje,tj. ne može ih se više
editirati.
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Start” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Kopiranje počinje.
Povratak na prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
∫
Stopiranje kopiranja ➡ 54
∫
COPY Navigator/Copying list ikone i
funkcije➡ 54
∫
Za provjeru opcija COPY Navigator-a
1 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir titla i pritisnite
[SUB MENU].
COPY Navigator
HDD
T otal : 0
No. Nam e
001 ARD
002 ZDF
003 AV2
004 ARD
005 AV2
006 ZDF
007 ARD
008 ARD
- --
Rectime
0:52(SP)
Properties
ENTER
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Si ze:
0MB( 0%)
Date Day
26. 9. FRI
27. 9. SAT
3. 10. FRI
3. 10. FRI
4. 10. SAT
10.10. FRI
10.10. FRI
11.10. SAT
Time Name of title
13:30
12:15
20:00
22:05
16:10
9:25
13:30
21:00
Page 01/01
So rt
RETURN
2 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Properties”
ili“Sort” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Properties:
Ime, datum snimanja , kanal itd.
Sort:
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir opcije i pritisnite [ENTER].
Možete odabrati način na koji ž
elite da vam se poredaju zapisi .
Priprema
≥
Umetnite disk kojeg želite kopirati (➡ 4, 5).
≥
Potvrdite da ima dovoljno prostora.
Kopiranje
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R i +R DL su
automatski finalizirani (➡ 81). Nakon procesa finaliziranja diskovi
postaju samo read-only,tj .više ih se ne može editirati.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(Ne mož
ete kopirati na finaliziranim diskovima.)
1
Dok je uređaj stopiran
2
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Copy” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Rectime
0:52(SP)
T otal : 0
No. Nam e
001 ARD
002 ZDF
003 AV2
004 ARD
005 AV2
006 ZDF
007 ARD
008 ARD
- --
RQT841 5
Time Name of title
13:30
12:15
20:00
22:05
16:10
9:25
13:30
21:00
Page 01/01
ENTER
52
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Si ze:
0MB( 0%)
Date Day
26. 9. FRI
27. 9. SAT
3. 10. FRI
3. 10. FRI
4. 10. SAT
10.10. FRI
10.10. FRI
11.10. SAT
RETURN
S SUB MENU
Select
Koriš
tenje
liste
kopiranja
pl ayli
sts on the
copying
list by repeating
6
Registriranje titlova i playlisti.
≥Ako želite kopirati bez izvršenja promjena (➡ s tep 7).
1 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Create List” i pritisnite
[►].
steps 2–4.
You cannot start copying when t he value of the “Size”
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
exceed s 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not suff icient).
[-RW‹VR›](➡
> 54)
[HDD]
5[HDD]
Pritisnite
to [-RW‹V›]
confirm.
> [-R] [2]
[-R]DL]
[+R] [+R]DL]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity:4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0%)
1 Co py Direction
No.
HDD > DVD
Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
2 Co py Mode
VIDEO
Pogledajte “Before copying” (➡ 52).
1
2
3
Pa ge 01/01
Start Copying
Dok je uređaj stopiran
ENTER
RETURN
Createco py list.
SUB MENU
2 Pritisnite [▼▲ ] za odabir “New item” i pritisnite
[ENTE R].
3 Pritisnite “Red” button za odabir “VIDEO” i pritisnite
“G reen” gumb za odabir “Playl ists”.
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “To
i pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir
Copy” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Create List
HDD
VIDEO Playlists
008
007
ARD 10.10. FRI
- --
Co py
ENTER
1 Copy Direction
Sou rce
HDD
Destination
D VD
RETURN
VIDEO
High Speed
3 Create List
Star t Copying
-- -
ARD 11.10. SAT
SUB MENU
-- -
Pa ge 02/02
Next
Select Previous
Next
4 Pritisnite [▼▲, ►◄] za odabir titlova ili playlisti
i pritisnite [ENTER].
HDD > DVD
2 Copy Mode
0:30(XP)
- --
Pre vious
Cancel All
0
Select theco pydirection.
ENTER
RETURN
4
High Speed
3 Create List
Podešavanje moda snimanja.
1 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Dubbing Mode” i pritisnite
[◄].
2 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Format” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
3 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “VIDEO” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
7
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Start
Copying” i pritisnite [ENTER].
8
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Yes” i
pritisnite [ENTER] za početak
kopiranja.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Copy & Finalize”
ili
“Copy Only” i pritisnite [ENTER].
4 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Recording Mode” i
pritisnite [ENTER] .
5 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir the mode i pritisnite [ENTER].
6 Pritisnite [►] za potvrdu.
5
Registriranje titlova i playlista
za kopiranje).
1 Pritisnite [ ▼▲] za odabir “Create List” i pritisnite
[◄].
[ENTER].
3 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “VI DE O” i pritisnite
[E NTER].
4 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Reco rding Mode” i
pritisnite
[ENTER].
5 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir modea i pritisnite [ENTE R].
6 Pritisnite [2] za potvrdu.
RQT8415
53
Kopiranje titlova ili playlisti
∫
Editiranje liste kopiranja
Pogledajte kontrole na stranici 52.
∫
Stopiranje transfera (dubbing)
Pritisnite i držite [RETURN] na 3 sekunde.
∫
Povratak na prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
∫
Snimanje i reprodukcij
(dubbing)
Mož
etesnimati i reproducirati saHDD dok ste u velikoj brzini.
Pritisnite [ENTER] za poništavanje displaya.
≥
Potvrda trenutnog statusa
Pritisnite [STATUS].
ZareprodukcijuDVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R
+R DL na drugim uređajima potrebno je finalizirati disk..
COPY Navigator/Copying ikone i funkcije
COPY Navigator /Copying list indikatori
Titlovi i playliste koje mogu biti kopirane
brzinsko na DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
(➡ 26)
Titlovi i playliste koje mogu biti kopirane
brzinsko na DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format ) (➡ 26)
(Ne mogu biti kopirane brzinsko na +R, +R DL ,
+RW)
“O ne time only recording” restrikcije
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Titlovi obrisani sa HDD “O ne time only
recording” restrikcije nakon kopiranja.
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Titlovi ili playliste sadrže slike.
(NTS C)
(PAL)
RQT841 5
54
Titlovi ili playliste koriste drugačiji sistem od
onoga koji je trenutno postavljen .
Odaberite opcije u koracima 6–4 (➡ 53, desna
kolumna)
1 Pritisnite [SUB MENU].
2 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir operacije i pritisnite
[ENTER].
Delete All
Add
Delete
Move
Delete All:
Brisanje svih opcija na listi kopiranja. Pritisnite
[►◄] za odabir “Yes” i pritisnite [ ENTE R].
Add:
Pritisnite [▼▲►◄] za odabir titlova i playliste
pritisnite [ENTER] .
Delete:
Briše odabranu opciju.
Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir “Yes” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Move:
Pomicanje odabranog titla. Pritisnite [ ▼▲] za odabir destinacije i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Kopiranje finaliziranih DVD-R, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format) i +R
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
Možete kopirati sadržaj fin aliziranih DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD- Video
format) i +R na HDD i editirati ih.Kod reprodukcije diskova, sadržaj je
prebačen na HDD ovisno o
8
Dok je gornji meni prikazan
Pritisnite [▼▲◄►] za odabir titla
kojeg želite koristiti, i pritisnite
[ENTER].
My favorite
01
Chapter 1
03
Chapter 3
podešenom vremenu.
01/02
02
Chapter 2
04
Chapter 4
06
Nakon koraka 1–4 (“Format” je automatski podešen na “DVDVideo”)
Povratak na prijaš
nji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Priprema
≥
Umetnite finalizirani disk (➡ 34).
Nakon koraka 1–5 (“Format” je automatski podešen na “DVDVideo”) (➡ 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
6
Stopiranje kopiranja
Pritisnite [■
].
Mož
eteipritisnuti i držati [RETURN] 3 sekunde za prestanak
kopiranja.
Podesite “Copy Time”.
≥
Ako nećete promjeniti opcije (➡ korak 7).
Podešavanje uređaja za transfer (dubbing)
Ovisno o podešenom vremenu
1 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Dubbing Time” i pritisnite [ ►] .
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Time setting” i pritisnite [ENTER].
≥
Podešavanje uređaja da kopira stvari sa diska
3Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Off” i pritisnite [ ENTER].
4Pritisnite [◄
] za potvrdu.
≥
Podešavanje vremena transfera
3Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “On” i pritisnite [ ENTER].
4Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Dubbing Time” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
Cop y
Cancel All
1 Co py Direction
DVD > HDD
2
2 Co py Mode
DVD -Video
3 Co py Time
Start Co pying
ENTER
Hour
00 Min.
XP
Set the time afew minutes
longer.
Pritisnite ENTER to change
settings.
RETURN
5Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Hour” i “Min.” i pritisnite
[ ▲▼]
Za podešavanje vremena snimanja.
6Pritisnite [ENTER ].
7Pritisnite [►] za potvrdu.
7
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Start
Copying” i pritisnite [ENTER].
RQT8415
55
Kopiranje fotografija
6 Register
still pictures
copy.
5 Registriranje
mirnihfor
slika
za
DV DDVD
Í
Í
Í
DRII VE
SELEC T
DRIVE
SELECT
≥
transfer
If you are going to copy a registered list without mak ing any
changes t o it (➡ step 7).
≥
Ko ž
elite premjestiti listu bez izrade promjena (korak 6).
You can register st ill pictures or still picture folders.
≥
Still pictures and folders cannot be regis tered on the same
list. ete registrirati mirne slike ili mape mirnih slika
Mož
TV T V
V OLUME
CH
Í
AV
CH
V OLUME
PAGE
1 HD D2
4 5
718
7
0
Numbered
buttBrojč
ons ani
gumbi
2
8
ST OP
SD
PAGE
Copy
ShowV iew
3
SD CARD > HDD
Cancel All
2 Co py Mode
0 SL OW/SEARC H
PLAY/x 1.3
PR OG//CHECK
Picture/Folder
Picture
PICTURE High Speed
Dubbing Direction
31
Create List
2 Dubbing Mode
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture/Folder
Picture
No.
Size
Name of item
New itemCapacity:
(Total=0) 4343MB
Destination
Cancel All
1 Co py Direction
9 DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SKIP

SD
CH
INPUT SELEC T MAN UAL SKIP
CANCEL
SKII P
:,9
3
6
9
DVD
N ew item ( Total=0)
Pa ge 01/01
;

Create copy list.
Start
Copying
PICTUR
E High Speed
ENTER
S SUB MENU
RETURN
3 Create List
∫
To register individual still pictures
ENTER
S SUB MENU
1 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Create List” and
pritisnite [1].
2∫
Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabirmirne
“Newslike
item” and pritisnite
Registriranjeindividualne
[ENTER].
31Pritisnite
1] za
odabir
thepritisnite
still pi cture and
Pritisnite[▼▲
[] za, 2,
odabir
“New
item”
pritisnite
[ENTER].
[;] to add the check mark and pritisnite [E NTER] (➡
57, Multi ple editing).
2
Pritisnite
[]
odabir
≥To
show other
pagesza
(➡
57) mirne slike i pritisnite
≥Za odabir the still pi ctures in another folder (➡ 57)
[ENTER].
≥To
edit the copying list (➡ 57)
RETURN

FUNCTIONS
ENTE R
3,4,2,1
ENTER
ENTER
SUB MENU
ENTER
SUB MEN U
FUNCTIONS
RETUR N
RETURN
S
CRE AT E
CHAPTER
MANUA L SKIIP
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥
You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
SUB MENU
RETURN
(➡ 7).
≥
You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R or CD-R/CD-RW.
SUB MENU
S
[SD]
CREATE
While stopped put the card in the slot, and t he menu (➡ below) is
automatically displayed. DISPLAY STATU S CHAPTER ERASE
RE C “Copy
REC MODE Pictures
EXT LINK
TIME R (JPEG)”, pritisnite
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir
TIME SLIP AUDIO DUBBING F Rec
[ENTER] and
then go to step 4 on page 57, “Copying all t he st ill pic tures on a
card—Copy All Pictures”.
SD Card
≥
Mož
ete koristiti SD Memorijske kartice sa kapacitetom od 8 MB do 1
Album View
GB (stranica 11).
You
can register
a multiple number
of still pictures
on
≥
Zaodabir
viš
eodjednom,pritisnite[]
za dodavanje
markera
the
copying
list by repeati
ng steps 2–3.
pritisnite
[ENTER]
(➡desno).
4 Pritisnite [2] to confirm.
≥
Prikazostalih stranica (➡desno)
∫
To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Create List” and
∫
Registriranje
mape osnovnim fnkcijama
pritisnite
[1].
2 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Picture/Folder” and pritisnite
1 Pritisnite [] za odabir “Picture/Folder” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
Destination Capacity:4343MB
Cancel All
[ENTER].
Picture/Folder
Picture
Cop y Pictures (JPEG)
Cop y Video (MPEG2)
Kopiranje koristeći listukopiranja
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
1 Co py Direction
Pritisnite
[RETURN] to exit the
≥
Nemož
etekopirati (dub) mirne slike snimljene na CD-u.
screen.
SD Cancel
C
>All
HDD
1 Dubbing Direction
SD CARD > HDD
Ne w item ( Total=0)
3 Pritisnite [▼▲]
za odabir “Folder” and pritisnite
[ENTER].
Pritisnite [] odaberite “Folder” i pritisnite [ENTER].
42Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir “New item” and pritisnite
[ENTER].
5 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir the folder and pritisnite
[ENTER].
3 Pritisnite [] za odabir “New item” i pritisnite
≥Za odabir a mul tipl e number of items together,
[ENTER].
pritisnite
[;] to add the check mark and pritisnite [ENTER] (➡
57, Multiple editing).
≥
≥
Zaodabir
To showviš
other
eopcija
pages
zajedno,
(➡pritisnite
57)
[ ]
≥To sw itch to another higher fol der (➡ 57)
oddavanje
pritisnite [ENTER] (➡dolje)
6 za
Pritisnite
[2]markera
to confirm.
Copying using the copying list
1
Dok j e stopiran
Pritisnite
1 Whil
e stopped [FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
2
Pritisnite [] odaberite
2 Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir “To
Others”
“DUBBING” i pritisnite [ENTER].
1
and
pritisnite [ENTER].
2
3 Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir
3
“Advanced
≥Ako ne želite mijenjati registriranu listu,pritisnite []
Source
SD CARD
Destination
HDD
Dubbing Direction
SD CARD
HDD
Dubbing Mode
Create List
0
Cancel All
1 Co py Direction
Sou rce
SD CARD
Destina tion
HDD
SD CARD > HDD
2 Co
py Mode
nekoliko
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
puta (korak 6).
0
3≥
IfPritisnite
you are not goin
[]
g to change
za odabir
the regist ered
“Dubbing
list pritisnite
[ 4]
7
6
several times (➡ st ep 7).
4
4
Direction”
[].
Set
the copypritisnite
direction.
≥If1you
are not goin
g tza
o change
the copying
direction,
Pritisnite
[]
odabir “Source”
pritisnite
[ENTER].
pritisnite
4 Pritisnite [] za odabir diska i pritisnite [ENTER].
[4]Isti
(➡drive
stepkao
5). i u transfer modeu može biti odabran.
1 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Copy Direction” and
pritisnite
5[1].
Pritisnite [] za potvrdu.
2Podesite
Pritisnite [▼▲]
mode
za snimanja.
odabir “S ource” and pritisnite
[ENTER].
3≥
Pritisnite
[▼▲]
za mode
odabir
the drive and5).
pritisnite
Ako ne želite
promjeniti
snimanja(korak
[ENTER].
41Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir “Destination” and pritisnite
Pritisnite [  ] za odabir “Dubbing Mode” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
[1].
5 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir the drive and pritisnite
[ENTER].
2 Pritisnite [ ] za odabir “Format” i pritisnite
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6[ENTER].
Pritisnite [2] to confirm.
RQT841 5
56
5
3 Pritisnite
[ ] za odabir
“P ICTURE” i pritisnite
Set
the recording
mode.
[ENTER].
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, pritisnite
[ 4]
No.
Size
Name of item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
N ew item (Total=0)
Picture/Folder
Picture
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir
Copying”
and pritisnite
Pritisnite []
za odabir “Start
≥
For individual still pi ctures only
[ENTER].
When specifying anot her folde r as t he copying destination,
Dubbing”
select “Folder”. i pritisnite [ENTER].
Folder
New folder
001
DVD
001100__
100__
DVD
002 101__ DVD
003 102__ DVD
ew f older
002 101__ DVD
8
003 102__ DVD
Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Yes”
and
pritisnite
[ENTER]
to etak
start
pritisnite
[ENTER]
za poč
copying.
kopiranja
-
To stop copyi ng
Pritisnite and hold [ RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Ne w folder
Copying
Transfer mirnih
all the
slika
still
na pictures
DVD-RAM—
on a card—
Copy
All
Pictures
KOPIRANJE SVIH SLIKA
Prikaz ostalih stranica
Pritisnite []odaberite “Previous” ili “Next”i pritisnite
[ENTER].
[SD] > [HDD] or [RAM]
Preparation
Pritisnite [DRI VE SELECT] za odabir the SD drive.
≥Mož
ete pritisnuti [ ] za prikaz ostalih stranica.
1[SD] >Wh[HDD]
ile stopped
or [RAM]
Povratak na prijaš
nji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Delete All
(for a folder) (➡ 56, right column)
Odabir
druge
A dd
1∫
Pritisnite
[SUBmape
MENU].
[]za
odaberite
“F old
er” iion
pritisnite
Delete
21 Pritisnite
Pritisnite [▼▲]
odabir the
operat
and [ENTER].
2 Pritisnite [3, 4] za odabir mape, pritisnite [ENTER].
pritisnite
[ENTER]
. (JPEG)
Create
List
Picture
\DCIM
SD CARD
001
002
003
004
---
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
Delete All:
Delet e all items registered on t he copying list .
≥
Mirne slike
itihodabir
mapa ne
mogu
u istoj listi
Pritisnite
[2,različ
1] za
“Yes”
andbiti
pritisnite
.
[ENTER].
Add:
≥
Ako postoji
više mapa,mož
eteodabir
ih
Pritisnite
[▼▲,
2, 1] za
the still picture or folder to be
mijenjati
added
koristeć
i [ ].
(Mape č
ije su
and
pritisnite
[ENTER].
Opcije više od prethodnih ne mogu biti na istoj listi.)
Delete:
Delet
e t he selected
items.
∫
Editiranje
transfera
(dubbing) -liste
Pritisnite
za odabir
“Yes” and pritisnite [ENTER].
Odaberite[2,
ih u1]
koraku
4 (➡lijevo)
Erase
All
You
can also[SUB
delete multiple items (➡ above, Multiple
editing).
1 Pritisnite
Folder
0001
103__DVD
0002
0003
0004
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
2 Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir “To
Others”
2 Pritisnite [►] za odabir “To
and pritisnite
Others”
i pritisnite[ENTER].
[ENTER].
3 Pritisnite
[▼▲]
za odabir
PICTURES”
i pritisnite
[ENTER].
“Copy All
Pictures”
and pritisnite [ENTER].
COPY ALL PICTURES
Copy to
HDD
\DCIM
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102 DVD
MENU].
2
Pritisnite [] za odabir operacije i pritisnite
Add
§
[ENTER].
Erase
To
cancel
alleditiranje
registered
copying
§ Vi
š
emodno
je moguć
e (➡setti
dolje).ngs and l ists
Af ter performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
tavanje svih
lista
1Poniš
Pritisnite
[▼▲]
za odabir “Cancel All” and pritisnite [ENTER] .
3 (➡lijevo)
2U koraku
Pritisnite
[2, 1] za odabir “Yes” and pritisnite [ENTER].
1 Pritisnite [] odaberite “Cancel All” i pritisnite [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following sit uat ions.
–When a title or still pic ture has been rec orded or delet ed at the
copy source
–When st eps have been t aken, for inst ance, to turn off the unit,
4
Pritisnite
[▼▲]
za odabir
“Copy to”
≥Ako se prikaž
e više mapa,odabirete
ih sa[].
and pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir the
4drive.
Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir “Copy
5 Pritisnite
[▼▲,
2, 1]
za odabir
to” i pritisnite
[▲▼]
za odabir
“Copy”diska.
and pritisnite [ENTER].
5 Pritisnite [►◄▲▼] za odabir
To stop copying
“Copy”i
Pritisnite
and holdpritisnite
[RETURN ] for [ENTER].
3 second s.
∫
Za odabir another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit )
1 Pritisnite [▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir “Fol der” and pritisnite
[ENTER].
If you want to swit ch t o another higher folder (➡ below).
Create List
Picture (JPEG)
Create List
SD CARD
Folder
SD CARD
Folder
103__DVD
0001
0002
0003
0004
--- -
--- -
----
----
--- -
--- -
--- -
--- -
001
002
003
004
- -- -- -- --
\ CIM\100__ DVD
D
100__ DVD
101__ DVD
102__ DVD
103__ DVD
P age 01/01
Previous
Pag e 001/001
Picture 0012
Next
ENTER
ENTER
File 0012
S SUB MENU
RET URN
RETURN
You can also select folders with the numbered butt ons.
e.g., 5:
[0] ➡ [ 0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [ 1] ➡ [ 5]
115:
[1] ➡ [ 1] ➡ [ 5]
≥The still pictures of different folders cann ot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when select ing the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
folders recognizable, while t he screen on
the right appears
1 Pritisnite [ SUB MENU] and pritisnite
[ENTER].
2 Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir the
higher folder and pritisnite
[ENTER].
You c annot register a folder with a
dif ferent higher folder to the same
list.
[Savjet]
≥
Kod transfera fileova iz mape u mapu,prebacit ć
e se svi
fileovi,a ne samo mirne slike.
≥
Ako u drugoj mapi postoji slika sa istim imenom,ona
se zamijenjuje sa novom.
≥
Ako prostor na disku prije đe moguću dozvoljenu
granicu za prijenos mapa,dolkazi do prekida transfera
001 100__ DVD
002 101__ DVD
003 102__ DVD
(➡ stranica 37).
Select Folder
Select f older to access.
≥
Print opcije (DPOF) se ne transferiraju.
\DCIM
Pritisnite ENTER to
set.
≥
Redosljed mapa na utječe na sam proces transfera.
SELECT
RQT8415
57
Kopiranje sa video rekordera
3
VOLUM E
CH
DRIV E
SELEC T
DRIVE SELECT
AV
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
SKII P
■
STOP
Snimanje počinje.
CH
ShowVii ew
Kada je snimanje završilo
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT SELECT
SLO W/SEARCH
PAUS E
Kada želite početi snimanje
Pritisnite [REC].
PAG E
Automatskog
snimanja.
Pauza
P LAY/x1.3
Pojavljuje se potvrdni ekran.Pritisnite [ENTER] za završetak DV
PROG /CHECK
FUNCTIONS
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
SU B MENU
DV automatsko snimanje (DV Auto Rec)
S
CRE AT E
CHAPTER
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANU AL SKII P
Kada se snimaju programi,istovremeno se i stvaraju poglavlja
REC MOD E EXT LIINK D IRECT TV REC
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
e. g. , Connecting to the AV3 or DV input termi nals on the front
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
≥
Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connect ing.
OPEN
/ CLOSE
EX T L IN K
DV IN
DRIVE
Ako DV automatska funkcija snimanja ne radi dobro, provjerite
spajanja i DV opcije opreme, te ugasite uređaj,te ga ponovno
upalite.
REC
CH
k1 . 3
SVI DEO IN VIDEOIN L/ MON O-AUD IO IN- R
A V3
Thi s unit
.
DV IN
S VIDEO IN
DV A uto Rec
VIDEO IN L /MONO - AUDIO IN - R
D V unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
Yellow White Red
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pi n)
Rec to HDD
S V ideo
cable§
Audio/Video
cable
Rec to DVD
Cancel
You can proceed to step 4.
SELECT
ENTER
1
Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir
“Rec to
HDD” ili “Rec to DVD” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
RETURN
Dok je uređaj stopiran
Ostala video oprema
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Spojite na Audio/ Video izlazne terminale.
Ako je audio oprema drugogo uređaja u mono tehnici spojite L/MONO.
§ S-VIDEO terminali postiž
u bolju sliku od VIDEO terminala.
Priprema
≥
Spojite video rekorder na ulazne terminale uređaja.
≥
Pritisnite [DVD]za odabir DVD-a.
≥
Kod snimanja dualnih programa
[RAM]
Kada su selektirani M 1 i M 2 na uređaju,mož
ete odrediti tip
playbacka na uređaju.
[DVD-R]
Odredite ili M 1 ili M 2 na spojenoj opremi. (Ne mož
ete odrediti tip
audia u opremi.)
Ručno snimanje
Priprema
≥
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir the HDD ili DVD drive.
≥
Pritisnite [REC MODE] za odabir modea snimanja.
≥
Kod snimanja bilingualnih programa (➡ 8, Important notes for
recording)
1
Dok je stopiran
Pritisnite [INPUT SELECT] za odabir
ulaznih kanala koje želite snimati
npr., Ako ž
elite snimat sa AV3 ulaznih terminala, odaberite
RQT841 5
58
“AV3”.
2
Počnite reprodukciju na uređaju.
2
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “To Others” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
3
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “ DV Auto Rec”.
4
Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir “Rec” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Operacije TV-a pomoću Q Linka
What is Q Link?
Q Link enables you to connect this unit t o a Q Link equipped Panasonic TV and perform various linked functions.
The following systems from other manufact urers have similar functio n to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operatin g inst ructions or consult your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥Megalogic (regist ered tradema rk of G rund ig)
≥SMARTLINK (registered t rademark of Sony)
≥DATA LOGI C (registered t rademark of Metz)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
Preparati on
≥Connect t his unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 14).
Download from the TV
When you connect the unit t o a TV, t he station list data is automatically copied from the TV to the
unit, and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as
on t he TV (➡ 18).
TV/DVD Auto On
When you pritisnite the fol lowing buttons, linked operations with the TV activate and corresponding
screens appear.
Wh en this unit is on:
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS]
[1] (PL AY)
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
[GUIDE]
[ShowView]
[PROG/CHECK]
Wh en this unit is off (standby mode):
Pritisnite [1] (PLAY)
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
[GUIDE]
[ShowView]
[PROG/CHECK]
≥[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on and corresponding screen appea r when you insert the discs.
DVD Auto Standby
When you turn the TV off, the unit is turned off as well. However, this function works in the stop
mode.
This function does not work during the following operat ions: Preset Download , Aut o-Setup, Aut o
Clock Sett ing, Child Lock and Manual Tuning.
Direct TV Recording
You can at once recor d the same programme t hat you are watching on the TV.
≥This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the
TV without having to change the channels on this unit .
1 Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir the HDD or DVD drive.
The select ed drive lights up on t he unit ’s display.
2 I f you selected the DVD drive
Inser t a disc. (➡ 24)
3 Pritisnite and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Recording starts.
To stop recordi ng
Pritisnite [∫
].
RQT8415
59
HDD, disk i menađment kartica
Setting the protection
DVD
Í
V OLUM E
CH
DRII VE
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
[RAM]
TV
Í
Preparation
≥
Pritisnite [DRI VE SELECT] za odabir the DVD drive.
AV
PAGE
2
5
8
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
4
ShowVii ew
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir
“Disc
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SKII P
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ l eft)
CH
SL OW/SEARC H
5
ST OP
PAUS E
PLA Y/x1.3
PROG//CHEC K
Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Yes”
pritisnite
[ENTER].
Mana gement
DVD- RAM
Titles
Used
FUNCTIONS
11
0 : 22
Remain
5:38(EP)
Disc Name
ENTE R
Disc Protection
ENTER
SU B MENU
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTE R
RE C
AUD I O
REC MODE
SELECT
RETURN
S
ENTER
MANU AL SKII P
EXT L INK DIRECT TV REC
On
Delete all titles
Format Disc
RETURN
The lo ck symbol appears closed when the disc is writeprotected.
S TATUS DISPL AY TIIMESL IP
To return to the previous screen
Pritisnite [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Pritisnite [RETURN] several times.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹ VR›] [SD]
≥
Mož
ete koristiti SD Memorijsku karticu sa kapacitetom 8 MB do 1 GB (➡
7).
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥
Wit h the write-protect tab in the protec t posit ion,
pl ay automat ically starts when inserted in the
unit.
Osnovne procedure
1
Dok je uređaj stopiran
PRO TECT
[SD]
Switch the writ e-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
2
Cartridge-protection
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “To Others” i pritisnite
FUNCTIONS
HDD
[ENTER].
Remai n 30:00 SP
Pl ayback
ShowView Reco rd
Reco rding
Ad vanced Co py
Providing a name for a disc
Playlists
Delete
Flexib le Rec
Cop y
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
DV Auto Rec
To Othe rs
ENTER
RETURN
3
Setup
HDD Management
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “DISC
MANAGEMENT” ili “CARD
MANAGEMENT” i pritisnite [ENTER].
npr., [RAM]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparati on
≥
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir the DVD drive.
≥
[RAM] Release protection (➡ above).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Disc
Name”
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
SELECT
ENTER
Off
RETURN
Format Disc
≥Kada je HDD odabran , “Delete all titles” i
“Format HDD” su prikazani.
≥Kada je SD odabran, “Format Card” je prikazano.
➡ 63, Entering t ext
≥
The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalized dis c, the name is
displayed on t he Top Menu.
≥
[+RW] The disc name is displ ayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment .
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
My f avorite
Documentary
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (
To return to the previous screen
Pritisnite [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Pritisnite [RETURN] several times.
RQT841 5
60
01
Chapter 1
01/02
02
Chapter 2
Deleting
titles
and playlists—Delete
Brisanjeall
svih
pjesama
i playlista
all titles
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparati
on
Priprema
≥Pritisnite [DRI VE SELECT] za odabir the HDD or DVD drive.
≥
Pritisnite
[HDD] ili [DVD]
za odabir diska
≥Release
protection
(➡ 60).
Nakon koraka 1–3 (stranica 60)
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
44 Pritisnite
[▼▲] za odabir
Pritisnite [ ] za odabir
“Delete all titles” and pritisnite
“Erase all titles” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
[ENTER].
Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Yes” and
Pritisnite[ENTER].
[] za odabir
pritisnite
“Yes” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Start” and
pritisnite
Pritisnite[ENTER].
[]za odabir
5
5
6
6 A message appears when finished.
“Start” i pritisnite [ENTER].
7 Pritisnite
[ENTER].
Poruka se prikazuje kada je gotovo.
To return to the previous screen
PritisnitePritisnite
[RETURN] . [ENTER].
7
To exit the screen
Pritisnite [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video t itle s will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still pic ture data (JPEG, TIFF) or computer data cannot be deleted.
Deletingsadrž
all the
of a disc or
Brisanje
aja contents
diskacard—Format
Formatiranje
[HDD ] [RAM] [-RW‹ V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
Priprema
≥Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir the HDD, DVD or SD
drive. [DVD] za odabir DVD-a.
Pritisnite
[Savjet]
[Note]
Formattingbriš
deletes
all contents
(including
computer
data),
≥
Formatiranje
e sve podatke
sa diska,uz
nemoguć
nost vrać
anja
and
theynatrag.
cannot
beajrestored.
carefully
before
podataka
Sadrž
se briš
e i u Check
sluč
aju da
imate zaš
titu.
proceeding. The contents are delet ed when you format a disc or
card
even ifkabel
you za
have
set protection.
≥
Ne
otpajajte
napajnje
kada formatirate disk. Ovo može
uništiti disk
Af ter performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4
Nakon koraka
1–3 (stranica
60)
Pritisnite
[▼▲]
za odabir “Format
HDD”,
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
4 Pritisnite
[] za odabir “Format
pritisnite [ENTER].
Disc”ili “Format” pritisnite [ENTER].
5 Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Yes”
5 Pritisnite
[] [ENTER].
za odabir “Yes”
and pritisnite
pritisnite [ENTER].
6 Pritisnite [2, 1] za odabir “Start”
6andPritisnite [] za odabir “Start”
pritisnite
pritisnite[ENTER].
[ENTER].
A message appears when format ting is finished.
Poruka se pojavljuje kada je disk formatiran.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
7
Pritisnite
take up to a[ENTER].
maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can rende r the disc or t he card unusable.
7
Pritisnite [ENTER].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
Formatiranju treba par minuta,ali je moguće i do 70 minuta
To stop
([RAM]).
formatting [RAM]
Pritisnite [RETURN].
≥You
can cancel
formattin g if it takes more than 2 minut es. The disc
≥
Stopiranje
formatiranja
must be reformat ted if you do t his.
Pritisnite [RETURN].
To return to the previous screen
Pritisnite [RETURN].
To exi t the screen
Povratak[RETURN]
na prethodni
ekran times.
Pritisnite
several
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN]nekoliko puta.
RQT8415
61
HDD, disk i menađment kartica
Pogledajte pregled kontrola na stranici 60.
Odabir pozadinskog stila–Top Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Mož
eteodabratipozadinu koja ć
e se pokazivati na DVD- Video top menu
nakon finalizacije.
Priprema
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir DVD drive-a.
[Savjet]
Nakon finaliziranja
≥
Disk postaje samoreprodukcijski,ne mo žete ga više
editirati.
Nakon koraka 1–3 (➡ 60)
4
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Top
Menu” i pritisnite [ENTER].
5 Pritisnite [▼▲◄►] za odabir
pozadine i pritisnite [ENTER].
≥
Titlovi su podijeljeni u 5-o minutna poglavlja.
≥
Ne vadite glavni kabel za napajnje tijekom finaliziranja,nože
doći do uništenja diska
Top Menu List
≥
Ne mo žete finalizirati diskove izrađene na drugoj opremi
1
2
3
Prikaz nakon finaliziranja
Thumbnail
(Slika)
Ime
4
5
6
01
7
8
9
Odabir dali želite prvo prikazati meni–
Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Možete odabrati dali želite da vam se prikaže meni nakon
finaliziranja.
Priprema
Pritisnite [DRIVE SELECT] za odabir DVD drivea.
Nakon koraka 1–3 (➡ 60)
4
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Auto-Play
Select” i pritisnite [ENTER].
5 Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Top Menu”
ili “Title 1” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Omogućavanje diskovima da budu
reproducirani na drugoj opremi–Finalize
Izrada glavnog menija—Create Top Menu
[+RW ]
+RW diskovi ne sadrže podatke o glavnim menijima.
Nakon koraka 1–3 (stranica 60)
4
[-R] [-R]DL] [- RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Napravite selekciju sa “Top Menu” i “Auto-Play Selec t” (➡ iznad)
prije finaliziranja diska.
Priprema
Pritisnite [ DRIVE SELECT] za odabir DVD drivea.
Nakon koraka 1–3 (➡ 60)
4
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Finalize” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
5 Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir “Yes” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
6 Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir “Start” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Poruka se pojavljuje kada je finaliziranje završilo.
7
RQT841 5
62
Pritisnite [ENTER].
Povratak na prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta.
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Create Top
Menu” ai pritisnite [ENTER].
5
Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir “Yes” i pritisnite
[ENTER].
6
Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir “Start” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
7
Pritisnite [ENTER].
• Snimanje ili editiranje diska može obrisati meni.U tom slučaju napravite
meni ponovno.
Unos teksta
1
2
Unos imena
ekrana.2, 1] za
Pritisnite
[▼▲,
Title (vremensko snimanje)
odabir
a
Odaberite “Programme Name” u koraku 3 na
stranica,
26 , 2 8.
character
and pritisnite
Title
Odaberite “Enter Name” u koraku 4 na
[ENTER].
Pritisnite [▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir the character in t he name
PAGE
1DVD 2 3
TV
4 5 6
VOLUM
i ew E
CH ShowVi
DIRECT TVREC
7 8AV 9
DELETE
DVD0DRIVE SELE CT SD/PC
Numbered
butt ons
CH
INPUT
SELECT
¢
SKI P
:,9
Brojčani
gumbi ∫
SLO W/SEARCH
1
2
3
5
PAUS E
6PLAY/x1.3
CH
4
STOP
;
VIDEOPlus+
7
8
CANCE L
* CANCEL
0
SKIP
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
9PROG /CHECK
INPUTSELECT MANUALSKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
ENTER
PA USE
STO P
PLAY/x 1.3
SU B MENU
RETURN
DIRECTNAVIG ATOR
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
“Red”
TOP MENU
“Green”
REC
REC MOD E EXT LIINK D IRECT TV REC
 
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]ENTER
[+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
ENTER
S
CREAT E
CHAPTER
MANU AL SKII P
SUB MENU
RETURN
You can give names to recorded
t itles , etc.
The maximum number of characters:
P ROG/CHECK DISPLAY
STATUS
[HDD] [RAM]
Title
TIMER
Playlist
EXT LINK
ERASE
F
A
C
§
TIMESLIP
Characters
64 (44§)
REC MOD E
REC
CREATE
CHAPTER
AU DIO
64
B
Album of st ill pictures
36
Disc ([RAM])
64
Characters
44
40
Characters
36
Znakovi
[RAM]
64
If a nameNaziv
is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
(44 )
Play list
64
Disk Enter Name screen.
Show
64
Title (timer recording)
ili mirne slike
36
§ Mape
Tit le name
for timer recording
Select
“Programme
Name” in step 3 on page 30, right
column.
[DVD-R]
Znakovi
Title
Select
Naziv “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 44.
44
Playli
Disk st
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 47.
40
Di
sc [PC]
[SD]
Znakovi
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a
Mape ili mirne slike
36
disc” on page 60.
[Savjet] Album of still pi ctures
Select
Album dijelovi
Name ” se
in step
on pagena
48,ekranu.
“To edit
Ako je ime
pre “Enter
dugo,njegovi
neće4prikazati
the album”.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Pritisnite the “Red” button
Enter Name
or
“Green”
button za odabir
_
character type and
1 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 0
Top Menu Preview
2 A B C
a b c i j
*
pritisnite
3 D E F
d e f
/ l %
[ENTE R]. Characters”:
“Standard
4 G H I
g h i fl$ &
; Delete
5 J K L
j k
l O N @
(➡ lef t, Alphabet characters,
n
6 M N O
_
Ad d to List
etc. )
7
P
Q
R
S
p
q
r
s
(
)
List Names
t u v
{ }
8 T U V
“O ther Characters”:
9 W X Y Z w x y z
\ |
π Set
(➡ below, Umlaut characters,
: ; ` ^
0 . , ? !
" '
Space
accented characters, et c.)
Standard Characters
Other Characters
m
o
[
]
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
Napomena:
1 1
2
3
4
5
6
Pritisnite [∫
] (Set).
7
8
9
0
%*
4 Gthen
H I the gscreen
h i flreturns
$ &
“Writing...” appears
to the Title view
; ERASE
5 J K L
j
k l O N @
screen
and so on.6 M N O
π SET
m n o
[
] _
0 –– ¢
To end par tway
Pritisnite SELEC T
[ RETURN].
Text is
EN TER
2 A B
3 D E
C
F
7 P
Q
R
8 T
U
V
9 W
X
Y
0 .
,
?
a
d
b
e
c
f
i j
/ l
p
q
r
s
(
t
u
v
{
}
)
-
Z
w x
y
z
!
"
:
;
\
`
|
^
S
'
SPACE
RETU RN
∫
To add a name
can
add frequently[]
used names and
t hem lat er.
2You
Pritisnite
zarecall
odabir
Maximum number of added names: 20
Title name for timer recording
Title
[RAM] [DVD-R] [SD] [PC]
Disc
Možete datI Imena za snimke….
[SD]
Maksimalan
broj
znakova:
Album
of st
ill pictures
1
3
RETURN
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+ RW]
[Note]
stranici 32.
field
Playpritisnite
list
and
[;] . (The selected characters are deleted.)
≥Using
the “Enter
numbered
buttons
to 4enter
Odaberite
Name”
u koraku
na characters
35. the letter “R”
e. stranici
g., entering
Odaberite“Disc Name” na koraku 3 na
1stranici
Pritisnite
40.[7] to move to the 7th
5 J K L
row.
7
7
Folder
of“Folder
stil
2Označ
Pritisnite
[7]l pictures
twice
Name”
to u koraku 4 na stranici
“R”. ite
6 M 36.N O
7
3 Pritisnite
[ENTE
R]. aprikazuje
7 P Q R
Ime
polja:
≥
To enter
space unešen tekst
Pritisnite [¢] and pritisnite
8 T U V
Enter Name
≥Add/recall
[ENTER].
names (➡ below)
_
znaka,pritisnite
[ENTER].
Maximum
number of characters per name:
20
Ponovite
ovaj
korak
za
unos
drugih
znakova.
After ent ering the name (st eps 1–2).
1 Pritisnite [▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir “Add to List” and
≥
Brisanje znaka
pritisnite
Pritisnite [] za odabir znaka i pritisnite [].
[ENTER].
≥
You can also pritisnite [9] za odabir “Add to List”.
≥
Upotrebljavanje
brojčanih
gumbiju
2 Pritisnite
[2, 1] za odabir
“Add”
and pritisnite
npr. Unos slova “R”
[ ENTER].
Pritisnite[ ▼▲,
[ RETURN]
canc
el.
1 ≥
Pritisnite
2,to1]
za odabir
“List Names” and pritisnite
1 Pritisnite [7] za pomicanje
[ENTER].
5 J K L
sedmi
≥
Youucan
alsored.
pritisnite [:] za odabir “List Names”.
7
2 Pritisnite
[7] dvaput
2 Pritisnite
[ ▼▲,
2, 1] za odabir the name
6 Mto7beNrecalOled
oznaku
R
7
and pritisnite [ ENTER] .
Pritisnite
7 P Q R S
∫
To3delete
an[ENTER].
added name
1 Pritisnite [ ▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir “List Names”
U pritisnite
V
8 T and
≥
Unos razmaka
[ENTER].
Pritisnite [¢ CANCEL] i
≥
You can also pritisnite [:] za odabir “List Names”.
[ENTER].
2 Pritisnite
[ ▼▲, 2, 1] za odabir the name to be delet ed.
3 Pritisnite [ SUB MENU] to show “Delete Name” and pritisnite
[ENTER].
Pritisnite []
4 Pritisnite [ 2, 1] za odabir “Delete” and pritisnite [ENTER].
Povratak
na prošli ekran.
5 Pritisnite
[RETURN].
3
Za kraj
Pritisnite [RETURN].
For
your
reference
Tekst
ne ostaj
e sačuvan
I f you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalization (➡ 62). When entering a title name, the name t hat
wil
l appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
[DVD-R]
window.
Za informaciju
Ako unesete du ž
e ime,samo dio se prikazuje u Top Menu nakon
Standard Characte rs
Other Characte rs
Enter Name
finalizacije
C_hapter 1_
Top Menu Pre vie w
1
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
Chapter 1
2 A
B
C
4
a
b
c
i
j
0
*
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
l
%
Enter Name
Chapter 1_
Title on TOP MENU
( DVD-R)
Chapter 1
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
2 A B
3 D E
C
F
a
d
b
e
c
f
i j
/ l
%
I
g
h
i
fl $
&
1
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
§
¨
©
ª
2
«
¬
-
®
¯
˚
±
²
³
´
4 G H
3
4
µ
¶
·
¸
¹
º
»
¼
½
¾
5
¿
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ Ç
È
5 É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
×
Î
Ï
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
õ
ö
÷
ø
4
*
Izgled daljinskog upravljač
a se mož
e razlikovati
od Vaš
eg modela,ali
6 Ó Ô Õ Ö
to ne utječ
e na funkcionalnost istoga. 87 Ýç Þè ßé àê ëá âì ãí äî åï æð
9 ñ
ò
ó
ô
0 û
ü
ý
þ
ù ú
RQT8415
ÿ
Space
63
FUNKCIJSKI prozor
By using the FUNCTIONS window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
FUNKCIJSKI prozor
Koristeć
i FUNKCIJSKI prozor,možete pristupiti funkcijama brzo i
1jednostavno
While stopped
DV D
TV
Í
Í
VOLUM E
CH
DRII VE
SELECT
1
AV
PA GE
1 2
4 5
7 8
0
3
6
9
CH
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
disc.
FunkcijskiFUNCTIONS
display ovisi o odabranom disku.
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
FUNCTIONS HDD
HDD
ShowV iew
Disc Remainin g 30:00 SP
Pl ayback
Pla yback
DIRECT N AVIG ATOR
Reco r ding
DELET E
INPUT
SELECT
SKIIP
Press
[FUNCTIONS].
Dok je uređaj stopiran
Delete
Reco rding
EPG
Copy
SL OW/SEARC H
GUIDE Plus+
TIMERRECORDING
To Othe rs
2
3
ShowVie w
ENTER
ST OP
PAUSE
RETURN
Dubbing
PLAY/x 1.3
DUBBING
ENTER
To Others
RET URN
PR OG//CHECK
22
FUNCTIONS
ENTE R
ENTER
RETUR N
SUB MEN U
RETURN
S
CRE AT E
CHAPTER
Pritisnite
zaselect
odabiran
opcije
Press
[3,[◄►
4] ]to
itemi and
pritisnite [ENTER].
press
[ENTER].
≥
Ako odaberete “To Others” i pritisnite [ENTER], sljedeć
i
≥
IfEkran
you select
“To Others” and press [ENTER] , the following
se pojavljuje
screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
Disc Remainin g 30:00 SP
[ENTER]. FUNCTIONS HDD
HDD
MANUA L SKIIP
Pla yback
FUNCTIONS
REC
REC MODE
AUDII O
HDD
EXT LIINK DIRECT TV REC
Pl aybackReco rding
EPG
Reco r ding
STA TUS DIISPLAY TIIME SLII P
123
Delete
Copy
Dubbing
ENTER
To Othe rs
ENTER
DIRECT N AVIGATOR
PLAYLISTS
Remain 30:00 SP
FLEXIBLE REC
“Timer Recording”
appea rs in countries
TIMERRECORDI
Sho wVie wNGRecor DISC
d MANAGEMENT
wher e the GUIDE Plus+
ShowView
Advanced Copy
system is available.
Pl aylists
Timer Recor
GUIDE
Plus+ ding SETUP
DUBBING
Flexi ble Rec
DV Auto
Rec
To Others
Return
Setup
≥
Ako odaberete “Return” i pritisnite [ENTER], mož
ete se
vratiti na prijaš
nji ekran.
≥
If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
screen.
RETURN
HDD Manag ement
Izlaziz FUNKCIJSKOG prozora
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Child Lock
7
8
0
SKII P
ST OP
9
ShowVii ew
INPUT
SELECT
DELETE
TChild Lock deaktivira funkciju svih gumbi na daljinskom
upravljaču. Koristite ovu funkciju za sprječavanje drugih ljudi
da koriste uređaj.
SL OW/SEARC H
PAUS E
Pritisnite i držite [ENTER] i
[RETURN] istovremeno
dok
se “X HOLD” ne pojavi na
zaslonu.
PLA Y/x1.3
PROG//CHEC K
ENTER
ENTE R
SU B MENU
RETURN
RETURN
S
CREAT E
CHAPTE R
RE C
AUD I O
RQT841 5
64
REC MODE
MANU AL SKII P
EXT L INK DIIRECT TV REC
STATUS DISPL AY TIMESL IP
Poništavanje zaključ
avanja
Pritisnite i držite[ENTER] i [RETURN] istovremeno dok “X
HOLD” ne nestane .
Promjena opcija uređaja
Česte procedure
CH
1
OPEN/CLOSE
EXT L IN K
SVIDEOIN VID EOIN
DV IN
CH
DRIVE
REC
k1 .3
L/ MONO- AUDI OI N- R
A V3
∫
2
OPEN/CLOSE
3
4
DVD
TV
Í
CH
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
STOP
VOLUM E
Tabs
PAG E
Setup
3
6
9
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
ShowVii ew
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
PAUSE
5
PLAY/x1.3
FUNCTIONS
ENTER
SU B MENU
SELECT
ENTER
Off
On
TA B
RETURN
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir menija i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir opcije i
pritisnite [ENTER].
RETURN
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
REC
D VD 1
Power Save
Quick Start
DivX Registration
Initialize
Connection
Others
SL OW/SEARC H
6
AUD I O
Options
Remote Control
Clock
CH
PROG /CHECK
ENTER
Menus
AV
SKII P
“Red”
“Green”
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “To Others” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Setup” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir tab i
pritisnite [■
].
Í
DRI V E
SELECT
Brojčani
gumbi
Dok je ure đaj stopiran
REC MODE
MANUA L SKIIP
RETURN
“Yellow”
Povratak na prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
EXT LIIN K DIRECTT V REC
STATU S DISPLAY TIME SLII P
Izlaziz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta.
(nastavljeno na sljedećoj stranici)
RQT8415
65
Promjena opcija uređaja
(nastavljeno)
Pogledajte kontrolnu listu na stranici 65.
Opcije
Tabs
Meniji
Opcije
Traž
enje Ručno (➡ 69)
Auto-Setup Restart (➡ 70)
Download sa TV (➡ 70)
Disc
Slika
Picture
RQT841 5
66
Jezik
Odaberite jezik za titlove,audio. [DVD-V]
≥
Pritisnite [ ENTER] za prikaz opcija.
≥
8 No Limit: Al l DVD-Video can be played.
≥
Neki diskovi se reproduciraju u jezicima bez obzira na vaše promjene.
≥
1 to 7:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corres ponding
≥
Unesite kod (➡stranica 46) sa brojčanim gumbima “Other ¢¢¢¢”.
ratings recorded on them.
Ako željeni jezik nije dostupan,odaberite tvornički jezik. Postoje diskovi u kojima možete promijeniti samo jezik menija (➡
≥
0 Lock All: Prohibits play of al l DVD-Video.
stranica 24).
≥
Unlock Recorder
≥
Change Password
Soundtrack
≥
English ≥French
≥
German ≥
Italian
≥
Spanish
≥
Change
Level
≥
Temporary
Unlock
≥
Original: Originalni jezik svakog diska će biti odabran.
≥
Ostali
¢¢¢¢
≥
On:
The
setting returns to “Off” when you change the dis c or
turn
unit off.
Titlovi
≥
Au the
tomatic:
Ako je jezik odabran za “Soundt rack” nije
≥
Of f
osposobljen, pojavit ć
e se automatski
jezik(tvornič
ki).
≥
English
≥
German
≥
French
≥
It alian
≥
English ≥
French
German ≥
Italian
≥
Spanish
≥
Spanish
≥
Dut ch ≥
≥
Some discs start in a c ertain languag e despite ≥
≥
Ostali ¢¢¢¢
Original:
The original language of each dis c will be selected.
any changes you make here.
≥
Ot her ¢¢¢¢
≥
I n case of English/French/ German/ Italian/
Me ni
≥
English ≥
≥
German
≥
Italian
≥
Spanish
Subtitle
≥
Automatic:
IfFrench
t he language
selected
for “Soundtrack”
is not
Spanish/Dutch languages, when you make
available,
subtitles
of
that
language
wil
l automatically
download
from
TV,
and
Country
sett
ing
of
≥
8
No
Limit:
Svi
DVD-Video
se
reproduciraju.
Rejting
Aut o-Setup
in plug-in, the language
appeareni
if avai
lable onovisno
t hat disc.
≥
1 to 7:
Određ
DVD-Video
o stupnju zaštite
Podesite ga na DVD-Video
play.
(“Soundtrack”/“Menus”) will be same and
≥
≥
German
≥
French
≥
It alian
. English
“Subtitle”
set to
“Automatic”. pin pomoću ≥
Slijedite instrukcije na
ekranu. will
Unesite
4 -znamenkasti
≥
Spanish
0 Lock All: Zabranjuje
≥
Dut ch sviranje svih DVD-Video.
≥
Enter a code (➡ 71) with the numbered
brojčanih gumbiju.
≥
Ot her ¢¢¢¢
≥
Unlock Recorder
≥
Mijenjanje lozinke
butt ons
when
you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.
≥
Nemojte zaboraviti
vašu
lozinku.
Menus
≥
English
German
≥
French
≥
It alian
≥
Change Level ≥
≥
Pri
vremenootključ
avanje
When the select ed language is not available
≥
Spanish
≥
Dut ch
on
the
disc
,
the
default
language
is
played.
≥
EP (6Sati): Mož
ete snimati 6 sati na praznim 4.7 GB
Vrijeme snimanja u EP modeu
There are discs where you can only switch the ≥Other ¢¢¢¢diskovima.
Odredite maksimalni broj sati snimanja u EP modeu
language from the menu screen (➡ 35).
(➡stranica 19, Vremena snimanja).
≥
EP (8Hour): Možete snimati 8 sati na praznim 4.7 GB
Settings for Recording
diskovima.
≥
Press [ENTER] to show the following sett ings.
DVD -Audio Video mode Play back
≥
On: Opcija se postavi na “Off” kod promjene diska ili
Recording time in EP mode
≥
EP (6ivanja
Sata):You
can record for 6 sata on an unused 4. 7 G B
isključ
uređaja.
Odaberite “On” za reprodukciju DVD-Video sadržaja i DVDSelect
the
maximum
number
of
sata
for
recording
in
EP
disc.
Audio.
≥
Off
mode (➡ 25, Recording modes and Aproksimativnoimate
≥EP (8 Sata):You can record for 8 sata on an unused 4. 7 G B
recording times).
disc.
≥
On:
Odabir
snimanja
slike.using “EP (6 Sata)” than when
The
soun
d quality
is betmirne
ter when
C omb Filter
≥
Off:
U
normalnim
using “EP (8 Sata)”.okolnostima,odaberite ovo.
Odaberite oš
trinu slike kod snimanja.
Re c for
High ena
Speed
Copy
≥On: Makes high speed mode copying to DVD-R, etc. possible.
Opcija
je podeš
na “On”
ako je “TV System” na “NTSC”
When
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
(➡
page high
48). spee d copy ing a title to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVDRW (DVD
-Video
format ),(➡
+R,
+R DL
+RW, it is necessary ≥Automatic:
–Pict ures
are saved
in 4:3. ava da bude što manje
Hybrid
VBR
R esolution
stranica
51,and
VBR)
Rezolucija
se prilagođ
to turn this setting “On” before recording to the HDD; however,
–Selectsmetnji.
the type
of audi o in advance from “Bilingual Audio
[RAM]
the screen size, et c. is restricted (➡ right ). We recommend
Selection”
(➡ 67).
≥
Fixe d:
Rezolucija
je postojana i ne mijenja se.
turning the settin g “Of f” if high spee d copy to DVD-R, etc. is ≥Off
not necessary when recording a programme.
≥
Automatic
Mirni
DVD mode
Speed for High Speed Copy
≥
Maximum
Odaberite
sliked koji
se prikazujecopying
kada je (When
pauziran
≥
Field: Od aberite ako ima smetnji kod odabira “Automatic”.
Select thetipspee
of high-speed
using high≥Normal
(Silent):
(➡
stranica
51).
Frame: Odaberite ako se ne mogu vidjeti manji tekstovi
spee
d copy
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW ≥
Selecting
“Normal (Silent )” means the noise generated by this
kada je “Automatic” odabran.
4X discs ).
unit is less
t han “Maximum”, however the time required for
≥
copying
On: Poglavlja
will double
na playlisti
(Aproksimativnoimat
se izvode kontinuirano
ely). .
Seamless Pl ay
≥
Off: Kod izvođenja poglavlja može doći do kratkog zastajanja.
Odaberite mode prikaza za playlistu
≥On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.
Comb Fi lter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
≥Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.
The set ting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➡ 70).
Still Mode
Select the t ype of pi cture shown when you pause play
(➡ 81, Frames and fields).
≥Automatic
≥Field: Select if jitt ering occurs when “Automatic” is select ed.
(The picture is coarser. )
≥Frame: Select if small t ext or f ine patt erns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is
clearer and f iner. )
Seamless P lay
Select the pl ay mode between playlist chapt er segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥On: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. Thi s does
not work when t here are several audio t ypes included on
the pl aylist and when using Q uick View. Addit ionally, the
positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.
≥Off: The points where chapt ers in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment .
Tabs
Tabs
Zvuk
Sound
Meniji
Menus
Dynami
PLAY k1.3
c Range
& Audi
Comp
o tijekom
ression
potrage
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Možete č
uti neka
ometanja,ovIsno
sku. viewing.
Change
the
dynamic
range for latoedi
night
Bili ngual Audio S election
Select
Opsegwhether
kompresije
t o record
[DVD-V]
the(Dolby
main or
Digital
secondary
only) Promijenite
audio type
opciju za kasno večernje gledanje.
when:
–Recording
or copying to audia
a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDOdabir jednokanalnog
Video
format),
+R,
+R
DL
and +RW.
Odredite za snimanje primarnog
ili sekundarnog audia:
–“Rec
for High Speed
Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26).
–Kod snimanja
na DVD-R.
–Recording
or copying
sound
LPCM
(➡ below,
“Audio
–Snimanja zvuka
u LPCM.
(➡in
ispod,
“Audio
Mode for
XP Mode
for
XP Recording”).
Recording”)
Opcije-podcrtane
stvari
su tvornič
ene
Options (Underlined
items
are the ki
fa podeš
ctory presets.)
≥
On: Audio se čuje tijekom prve potrage.
≥
On
≥
Off: Audio se ne č
uje tijekom pretrage. Qu ick View (➡stranica
≥
Off
25)
≥M 1
≥
On2
≥
M
≥
Offcannot select the audio on t his unit when recording from an
You
external
≥
M 1 source, such as when copying from a v ideo casset te
recorder
(except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
≥
M2
input
terminal).
Select
the ot
her snimate
equipment.
Ne mož
ete odabratI
ovuon
opcIju
kada
na vanjsku opremu
When
from the
unit’s
DV terminal,
select the type of
na DVrecording
D-R. Odredite
audio
na ostaloj
opremi.
audio recording f rom “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ below).
Digital Audio Output
Change the set tings when you have c onnected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 17).
≥
Press [ ENTER]
to show t he following settings.
Digitalni
Audio Izlaz
Promijenite
opciju
kada ste spojili drugi uređaj preko DIGI TAL AUDIO
OUT
t erminala
(➡stranica to
10).
PCM Down
Conversion
≥On:
Signals
are converted
48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
≥
Pritisnite
za prikaz
ovih
.
Select [ENTER]
how t o output
audio
withopcija
a sampling
frequency of 96
when the connected equ ipment c annot process signals
kHz
orKonverzija
88.2 kHz.
h a sampling
frequency ofna96 48
kHz kHz
or 88.2
PCM
≥
On: witSignali
su konvertirani
ili kHz.)
44.1 kHz.
≥
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the
≥Off: Signals
are output
96 kHzoprema
or 88.2 ne
kHz mož
. (Choos
e when
Odabir izlaznog audia na 96kHz ili 88.2 kHz.
(Odaberite
kada as
spojena
e odrediti
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency
the
connected
equipment
signale
na 96 kHz
ili 88. 2 can
kHz.)process signals with a
of over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy
kHz
or 88.2
kHz
.)
≥
Off: sampling
Signali sufrequency
izlazni na of
9696
kHz
ili 88.2
kHz.
(Odredite
kada
protection.
spojena oprema može odrediti signale na 96 kHz ili 88.2
Dolby Digital Select how to output the signal.
≥Bitstream:When
kHz.)
connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
Signali su konvertirani
Digital logo. na 48 kHz ili 44.1 kHz bezobzira na
equipment decodes the signal.
opcije
imaju frekvenciju
sempliranja
od 96 kHz
88.2
≥
PCM:iznad,ako
When connecting
to equipment
not displaying
the iliDolby
Select “PCM” if thi s unit decodes the signal kHz, ili disk
Digitima
al logo.
zaštitu od snimanja.
and out put s it as 2 channels.
DTS
Dolby Digital Odaberite kako da izlazni kanal se šalje
≥
≥
Bit
Bitst
st ream:
ream: When
Kod spajanja
connecting
opreme
to equ
naipment
zaslonu
disse
playing
prikazuje
the DTS
na
logo.
Dolby Digital log o.
[Note]
“Bitstream” tako da spojena oprema
≥
PCM: When
Kod spajanja
opreme,na
zaslonunot
neć
e biti prikazano
PCM:
connecting
to equipment
displaying
the DTS
No
t making the proper settings may result ≥
ilid a ga dekodira kao
Dolby logo.
indekodira
noise orsignal,
some trouble
for digital
“PCM ” (2
kanala).
recording.
DTS
≥
Bitst ream: Kod spajanja opreme,prikazat ć
e se DTS
MPEG
≥
Bit st ream: When connect ed to equipment with a built-in
logo.
MPEG decoder.
[Savjet]
≥
PCM: Kod spajanja opreme,neće se prikazati DTS
≥
PCM:
When connected t o equipment without a built-in MPEG
Ne korištenje stvarnih opcija audia može
logo.
decoder.
dovesti do pojave lošeg zvuka,zujanja I
sličnih ne
≥
Bitst ream:
Kod81)
spajanja opreme sa ugrađenim
AudioMPEG
Mode for XP Recordi
ngželjenih pojava..
≥
Dolby
Digital (➡
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP
≥LPCM (➡ 81)MPEG dekoderom.
≥
PCM: Kod spajanja opreme u kojoj nije ugrađen MPEG
mode.
–The
picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than
t hat ofdekoder.
normal XP mode recordings.
Audi o Mode za XP Snimke
Odaberite tip audia kod snimanja u XP mod eu.
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audi o when recording from t he unit ’s
DV input terminal (➡ 58).
Display
Audi o Mode za DV Ulaz
Možete odabrati tip audia
DV ulazni terminali (➡stranica 37).
Language
Choose t he language for these menus and on-screen
messages.
On-S creen Messag es
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.
Prikaz
Grey
Backg
round
Poruke
na ekranu
Select
Odaberite
“Off”dali
if you
želite
do automatski
not want toprikaz.
have the unit show t he grey
background
when tuner recept ion is weak.
Siva pozadina
Odaberite
FL
Display“Off” ako ne želite sivu pozadinu,ili ako je prijem
slabiji od normalnog.
Changes
the brightness of t he unit ’s display.
This
sett
ing
is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
FL Prikaz
(➡
68) to “On”.
Mijenja svijetlost zaslona.
≥
–The
Dolb yaudio
Digitalrecording
(➡stranica
becomes
51)
Dolby Digital even if you
≥
LPCM
(➡stranica
51) using a recording mode ot her than XP.
selected
LPCM when
–When
–Kvaliteta
recording
slike LPCM
a bilingual
snimaka
broadcast,
može bitiselect
manjathe
od X
type
P of
mode in
snimanja.
audio
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
–Audio snimke postaju Dolby Digital č
ak i ako odaberete LPCM
≥Stereo
1: Records audio (L1, R1).
kod kori štenja drugog modea od X P-a.
≥Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
–Kod snimanja jednokanalnog audia,odaberite “Bilingual Audio
subsequent t o original recording.
Selection”
(➡ords
dolje).
≥Mix:
Rec
both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
When
recording
bilingual
broadcast,
≥
Stereo
1: Snima
audio (L1,
R1). select t he type of audio in
advance
“Bilingual
Audio
Select ion” (➡ above).
≥
Stereo from
2: Snima
dodani
audio(pripovijedanje)
(L2, R2)
na
originalnu
snimku.
≥English
≥Deut sch
≥Français
≥Italiano
≥
Mix:
Snima Stereo 1 i Stereo 2.
≥
Español
≥Nederlands
Kod snimanja jednokanalnog audia na DVD-R ili snimanja u
LPCM audio, odaberite tip audia iz “Bilingual Audio Selection”
≥
Aut
omatic
(➡
dolje).
≥Off
≥
Automati c
≥
On
≥
Off
≥Off
≥
On
≥
Off
≥Bright
≥Dim
≥Aut omatic: The display turns dark during pl ay and disappears
≥
Bright
when
≥Dim
the unit is turned off. It reappears
moment arily if a button is pressed. While using this
mode, the standby power c onsumption can be
reduced.
RQT8415
67
Promjena opcija uređaja
Pogledajte vodičkontrola na stranici 65.
Tabs
Tabs
Menus
Meniji
Connection TV
(➡ 18)
TVAspect
Rezolucija
Set to mat ch the type of television
connect ed.
Progressive
(➡
22)
Progressive
This
setting is fixed with
“Off”
if you set “AV1 Output”
TV System
to “RG B 1 (without
component)”
AV1 izlaz or “RGB 2
(without
component)”.
Odaberite
izlaz sa AV1 terminala.
TV
S ystem“RG
(➡ B
70)
Odaberite
(without component)” za RGB izlaz.
AV1
Odaberite
Output“Video (with component)” ili “S-V ideo (with
component)”
za izlaz.
Selects
t he output
from the AV1 terminal.
Select
“RGB 1 (withou t component)” or “RG B 2 (without
AV2 Opcije
component)” for RGB out put .
Podesite detalje spojene opreme.
Select
“Video (wi th component )” or “S Video (wit h component)”
≥
Pritisnite [ENTER] za prikaz odre đenih opcija:.
for
component output (progressive output).
Set according
AV2 Ulazt o t he signal and terminal of the connected TV.
When Podesite
a decoder
is connected,
to “RGB
1 (without
“RGB
( Not NTSCdo)” not
kodset
prijema
ili snimanje
component)”.
RGB izlaznog videa sa vanjskih uređaja.
AV2 Spajanja
Opcija predstavlja “Normal” ako podesite “TV S ystem” na
“NTSC” (➡stranica 48).
AV2 Settings
Ext Link
Set to Opcija
match se
thene
connected
equipment.
može mijenjati
ako je“TV System” podešen
≥
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
na “NTSC” (➡stranica 48).
AV2 Input
Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording
RGB output from external equipment.
AV2 Connecti on
This set ting is f ixed with “Ext” if you set “TV System” to
“NTSC” (➡ 70).
Ext Link
This setting c annot be made when the “TV Syst em” is set to
“NTSC”
Owner
ID (➡ 70).
Za spriječ
avanje da ako je ovaj ure đaj ukraden-osoba koja
ga je ukrala ne može koristiti zadajte pin broj i stavite
određene osobne informacije.
Jednom kada je pin unešen ne možete ga
promijeniti.ZAPAMTITE PIN.
Others
68
≥
16:9
≥
16:9
≥
On
≥On
≥
4:3
≥
4:3
≥
Of f
≥
Off
≥PAL
≥
Letterbox
≥
Letterbox
≥NTSC
≥
Video (with component )
≥
S-Video ( with component )
≥
PAL
≥
NTSC
≥
RGB (without component)
≥
Vide o (with comp onent):
Se lect wh en a TV is conn ect ed that can receive a co mposite signal.
≥
S Video (with co mpone nt):
Select when a TV is co nnected that can receive an S Vide o signal.
≥
RGB 1 (without component):
Select when a TV is connec ted that can receive an RGB
signal. If you always would like to view the pic ture f rom the unit
≥
inVideo
RGB signal, select t his mode. The TV screen will
≥
S-Video
aut
omatically switch to display the picture from the unit when
the
unit
is turned
≥
RGB
( Ne
NTS C )on.
≥
RGB 2 (without component):
≥
Decoder:
dekoder
Select when aKada
TV isjeconnec
tedspojen.
that can receive an RGB
≥
signal.
Normal:
If you Kada
wouldje
like
Video
to switch
ili satelitski
to display
reciever
the picture from the
unit only whenspojen.
pl ayback or viewing menus, select t his mode.
≥
Ext Link 1:
Kada je spojen digitalni reciever koji prenosi
signal kroz 21-pinski Scart kabel.
≥
Ext Link 2: Kada je spojena vanjska oprema sa
≥
RGB/Video
timerom..
≥
RGB
≥
Video
≥
S Video
≥
Decoder: When a decoder is connected to descramble the
scrambled signals (e.g., C+decoder).
≥
Ext :
When the VCR or a digital/satellite receiver is
connected.
≥
Ex t Link 1: When a digital/satellit e recei ver which trans mits a
special control signal recordings via the 21-pin
Scart
isniconnected.
≥
PIN broj ≥
Ime cable
≥
Kuć
broj ≥Pošt.broj
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled
by the control signal.
≥
Ex t Link 2: When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
When it turns on, recording start s.
When it turns of f, recording st ops.
Ship pi ng
Co ndition
Remote
Control
(➡ 23)
Poništava
se sve isprogramirano(svi timeri i ostalo)ne
Clock
(➡ 71)
poništavaju se šifre i slično.
Power
Save
≥
Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
–“FL Display”
is automat ical ly set to “Aut omatic” (➡ 67).
Tvornič
ke postavke
–The “Quick Start” f unct ion does not work. (I t is automatically
Sve opcije koje se mogu programirati se postavljaju na
turned to “Off”.)
tvornič
razinu..
–Whenkuthe
unit is off, Pay TV programmes cannot be wat ched
on the TV because t he signal from the connected decode r is
not looped t hrough. To watch them, turn on the unit.
≥
If “Quick Start” is set to “O n”, “Power Save” is aut omatically
turned to “Of f”.
Quick Sta rt
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start
recording as quick as Aproksimativno. 1 second§ after turning it
on. You c an start recording s oon af ter deciding you want to
record somet hing.
§
Only when recording t o t he HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥
If th is is set to “On”, “Power Sa ve” is automatically turned to “Off”.
≥
Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You pl ay a disc or st art re cording to discs other than DVDRAM.
–You want to make ot her operations.
–The clock has not been set .
≥
Yes 1
≥
DVD
≥
No
DivX Registrat ion
≥
You need this registratio n code to purchase and play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VO D) content (➡ 39).
Initialize
≥
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
All the sett ings except for t he ratings level, ratings password
and time settings return to the factory preset . The timer
recording programmes are als o cancelled.
Default Sett ings
All the set tings other than the programmed channels, time
sett ings, country sett ings, language settings, disc language
sett ings, rat ings level, ratings password, remote cont rol
code, return to the fac tory presets.
RQT841 5
Opcije-podcrtane
Options (Underlined
stvari
items
su tvornič
are thekifactory
podešene
presets.)
≥
DVD 2
≥
DVD 3
≥
On: Power consumptio n is minimized when the unit is t urned
t o st andby (➡ 82).
≥
Yes
≥
Off
≥
No
≥
On
≥
Off:
≥
Yes
≥
No
≥
Yes
≥
No
Standby power consumption is less t han when this is
set to “O n”.
Tuning
1 Tuning
Whi le stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
1
Dok je uređaj stopiran
2 Press
[3, 4] to select “To Others”
32
43
4
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
and
press [ENTER].
Pritisnite
odabir
“To Others”
Press [3, [◄►]
4] to za
select
“Setup”
and
i pritisnite [ENTER].
press [ENTER].
Pritisnite
odabir
“SETUP”
Press
[3, [◄►]
4] to za
select
“Tuning”
and
pritisnite [ENTER].
press [1].
Pritisnite
[◄►] za odabir “Tuning”
Setup
and pritisnite [►].
∫
To change the tuning settings for individual
∫
Mjenjanjepodeš
avanja za svaki program posebno
programme position
6
Press [3,
4, 2, 1]
6 Pritisnite
[]
za
to select
a
odabir
programske
programme
pozicije
pritisniteposition
and
[ENTER].press [ENTER].
SELECT
To
or change
name of
of aa TV
TVstati
station
To enter
enter or
change the
the name
on
Pritisnite
4,, 1]
2, to
1]enter
to enter
station
Press
[3,[3,
4, 2
station
namename
and
and
[ENTER].
presspritisnite
[ENTER].
If the
the station
station name
If
name needs
needs aa blank
blankspace,
space, select
select
the
the blank
blank between
between “Z”
“Z” and
and “¢”.
“¢”.
Channel
Channel
To
To enter
enter newly
newly available
avail able TV
TV stations
stationsor
orchange
change
the
channel
number
of
an
alrea
dy
tuned
the channel number of an already tuned TV
TV
station
station
Pritisnite
or the
numbered
buttons
Press [3,[3,
4] 4]
or the
numbered
buttons
to to
enter
enter
the channel
number
the desired
TV
the channel
number
of theofdesired
TV station.
station. Wait a few moments until the desired TV
Wait a few moments unt il the desired TV station
station has been tuned.
has been tuned.
Af ter t he desired TV station is t uned, press
After the desired TV station is tuned,
[ENTER].
pritisnite
Fine Tuning
Fine Tuning
To
obtain the best tuning condition
[ENTER].
To obtain the best tuning condition
Press
[3, 4] to adjust the best t uning condition
Pritisnite [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning
and press [ENTER] .
≥Press
[1] to[ ENTER].
ret urn to “Aut o”.
and
pritisnite
≥
Pritisnite
[1] to return to
“Auto”.
To
sel
ect
the
video system type
To preset pay TV stations
Press
[3,
4
]
to
select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the
Pritisnite [3, 4] za odabir “On” and pritisnite
pict
ure la cks colour, and press [ENTER].
[ENTER].
Za odabirthe
systemically
type distinguishes
Auto:
Thisvideo
unit automat
Pritisnite [3, 4] za odabir “PAL” or “SECAM” if
PAL and SECAM signals.
the picture la cks colour, and pritisnite [E NTER].
PAL:
For receiving PAL signals.
Auto:
This unit automatically dis tinguishes
SECAM:
For recei ving SECAM signals.
PAL and SECAM signals. PAL:
To sel ectFor
thereceiving
audio reception
ty pe
PAL signals.
IfSECAM:
sound quality
is
poor,
press
[3,
4] to select
For receiving SECAM signals.
“BG” or “L” and press [ENTER].
BG : PAL B.G.H/SECAM B.G
L: SECAM L, L’
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4 ] to select “On” if the st ereo sound is
dist orted due to inferio r reception conditions, or if
you want to record the normal (mono) sound
during a st ereo, bilingual or NICAM §2 broadcast,
and press [ENTER].
R ETURN
Mož
ete dodatI/IzbrisatI kanal/promIjenitI položaj ka nala.
You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.
55
Pritisnite [] odaberite “Manual”
Press [3, 4] to select “Manual” and
pritisnite[ENTER].
press [ENTER].
Man ual Tuning
Tuning
PosManual
Name Ch
P os Name
1 ARD
4
11
2 ZDF
2
12
3 N3
5
13
4 HR3
8
14
If you delete
p rogramme
position
5 BR3
10
15
of Host channel,
GUIDE Plus+
data
6
16
SELECTis also deleted.
7
Continue?17
8
ENTER
RETURN
9
18
10
20
Ch
condition
Delete
M ove
Add
Yes pozicije No
Brisanje programske
Pritisnite []za odabir pozicije,pritisnite [A].
If you select “Yes” and press [ ENTER], t he following screen
Dodavanjeprazne
appears. programske pozicije
Pritisnite [] za odabir programske pozicije,pritisnite [ B].
Video
Decoder
System
Vide o
System
Manual Tuning
Premiješ
tanje pozicije
Pos NameTVpostajena
Ch
Pos Namedrugo
Ch programsko mjesto
1 ARD
4
11
1 Pritisnite []za
programske pozicije I pritisnite
2 ZDF
2 odabir
12
3 N3
5
13
[C] .
4 HR3
8
14
5 BR3
10
15
2 Pritisnite []
za dodijelu nove pozicije
6
16
7
17
programu,pritisnite
[ENTER]
za potvrdu te nove
8
18
19
pozicije. 109
20
Audio
Mode§1
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
Delete
M ove
Add
Mono
To delete a p rogramme position
Press [3, 4 , 2, 1] to select a programme positio n and press the
“Red” butt on.
To add a bl ank programme position
Press [3, 4 , 2, 1] to select a programme positio n and press the
“Green” button.
301
Name
Name
TA B
Ručno
Manual
Off
Title Page
To
To change
change the
the programme
programme positi
position
on in
in which
which
the TV
the
TV stations
stations are
are assigned
ass igned
Pritisnite
or numbered
buttons
odabir
Press [3,[3,
4]4]
or numbered
buttons
to za
select
the
the number
of desired
the desired
programme
position
number
of the
programme
position
and
and
[ENTER].
presspritisnite
[ENTER].
D ownload f rom TV
ENTER
Off
Auto
301
BG
Mono
Pos
Pos
Auto -Setup Restart
Sound
Tuning
Display
Connection
Disc
Others
Title Pag e
Audio Mode
RETURN
1
ARD
1
4
ARD
Auto
4
Auto
Auto
BG
Off
Pres s [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
Download from TV
Manual
Po s
Name
Po s
Channel
Name
FineTuning
Channel
Fine
VideoTuSystem
ning
Decoder
Audio Mode
Video
System
Mono
RETURN : lea ve
RETURN : leave
Auto-Setup Restart
Picture
SELECT
SELECT
RETURN
Manual
Tuning
SETUP
Disc
Manual
Tuning
Manual
Tuning
Titl e Page
To m ove a TV station to another programme position
1 Press [3 , 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
the “Yellow” button.
2 Press [3 , 4, 2, 1] to select t he new programme position to
whic h you want to assign the TV st ation and press [ENTER].
To enter the Teletext ti tl e page for a channel
Enterin g t it le page number allows the unit to
automatically record programme and station
names.
Press [3, 4 ] or numbered but tons to enter t he
number and press [ENTER].
≥To find the correct title page for the station, refer
to it s Teletext TV guide.
[Note]
≥When the unit connect ed to a Q Link compatible TV wit h a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable sets itself automat ically (➡ 18), only
deletion of the programme posit ion can be perform ed.
≥If you delete programme position of Host Channel, t he G UI DE
Plus+ data is also deleted.
You can make the following two settings by selecting the external
inpu t channel (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4) in step 5.
≥Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)
In order to record properly, make the appropriat e settings to match
the connected equipment.
≥Title Page (Auto/O ff)
I t is not displayed in Germany. Audio recept ion t ype is fixed at
“BG”.
§ 2 Not provided for Germany.
§1
RQT8415
69
Promjena opcija uređaja
Pogledajte vodičkontrola na stranici 65.
TV Sistem
Restart set up
Mož
ete resetirati opcije kanala alp zbog nekog razloga vam je
prijem loš
(stranica 18)
Ako je slika ometana,promijenite opcije da odgovara vašem TV setu
Kojeg spajate.
Nakon izvedbe koraka 1–4 (stranica 69)
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
2 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “To Others” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
3 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Setup” and
pritisnite [ENTER].
4 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “Connection”
i pritisnite [■
].
5 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir “TV System”i
pritisnite [ENTER].
6 Pritisnite [▲▼] za odabir the TV system
i pritisnite [ENTER].
5
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Auto-Setup
Restart” ili “Download iz TV” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
Pojavljuje se potvrdni ekran
Odaberite “Download from TV” kada ste spojili uređaj na
Q Link-kompatibilni TV sa 21-pinskim Scart kabelom.
(Programske pozicije se traže preko TV-a i kopiraju se
preko ove konvencionalne funkcije.)
6
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir “Yes” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
• Ako se opcije zemlje prikazuju na meniju
Pritisnite [►◄▲▼] za odabir zemlje i pritisnite [ENTER].
Mož
ete koristiti sljedeć
u metodu - Auto-Setup. Kada je uređaj
upaljen i stopiran
Pritisnite i držite [▼ CH] i [CH ▲] na glavnom uređaju dok se
ne pojavi ekran odabira zemlje.
1
Dok je stopiran uređaj
Setup
TV System
PAL
NTSC
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta.
SELECT
ENTER
Povratak an prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Others
RETURN
≥PAL (tvorničke postavke)
–Odaberite kod spajanja na PAL ili Multi-system
television. Snimanje se izvodi NTSC kao PAL
60.
–Odaberite željeni program s kojeg želite snimati.
≥NTSC
–Odaberite kod spajanja na NTSC televiziju..
–Odaberite NTSC ulaz na ostaloj opremi.
Lista TV Recepcijskih kanala
Indikator
kanala
TV Kanal
Njemačka/Italija
RQT841 5
70
§
E2 – E10
13 – 20
E11 – E12
(Germany )
H1 – H2 (Italy)
A – H (Samo
Italy)
21 – 69
74 – 78
11 – 12
Ostale
zemlje
2– 4
5 – 10
Francuska
2–4
5 – 10, G – J
(172.00 to
220. 00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
7
Pritisnite [►◄] za odabir “Yes” i
pritisnite [ENTER].
E2 – E12
Izlaz iz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta.
—
Povratak an prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
—
—
E21 – E69
S01 – S05
E21 – E69
—
E21 – E69
S1 – S5
80
S1
M1
81 – 89
S2 – S10
—
B– F
(100.00 to
172. 00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
90 – 99
S11 – S20
121 – 141
S21 – S41
(Hyperband)
Samo za 8 MHz kanalni raster
K – Q (220.00
to 300.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
S21 – S41
(299.25 to
467. 25 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
M2 – M10
U1 – U10
S21 – S41
(Hyperband)
■Mijenjanje svih opcija odjednom
(PAL!# NTSC) Dok je stopiran pritiščite []i [<
OPEN/CLOSE] na 5 ili viš
e sekundi.
Ručno podešavanje sata
Obično,uređajev mehanizam sam usklađuje sat ali zbog lošeg prijema,može doći do prekida te funkcije.
U ovom slučaju,slijedite upute za ručno podešavanje sata.
≥
U slučaju nestanka struje,sat ostaje raditi u memoriji na oko 60 minuta.
1
Dok je uređaj stopiran
2
3
4
5
6
Pritisnite [FUNCTIONS].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “To Others” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Setup” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Others” i pritisnite [■].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Clock” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Pritisnite [▼▲] za odabir “Off”
“Automatic” i pritisnite [ENTER].
Clock
Automatic Off
Time
15 : 45 : 39
Date
1 .
8 . 2006
Number
0
9
CHANGE
SELECT
Please set c lock manually.
ENTER: store RETURN: leave
ENTER
RETURN
7
Pritisnite [◄►] za odabir opcije koju želite
promijeniti.
Mijenja se kako je prikazano:
Sati
Minute
Second
8
9
Day
Month
Year
Pritisnite [▼▲] za promjenu opcija.
Mož
ete koristiti i brojčane gumbe za promjenu.
Pritisnite [ENTER] kada ste gotovi sa opcijama.
Sat počinje.
Izlaziz ekrana
Pritisnite [RETURN] nekoliko puta.
Povratak an prijašnji ekran
Pritisnite [RETURN].
Kodna lista jezika Unesite kod sa brojčanim gumbima.
Abkhazian:
6566
Afar:
6565
Afrikaans:
6570
Albanian:
8381
Ameharic:
6577
Arabic:
6582
Armenian:
7289
Assamese:
6583
Aymara:
6589
Azerbaijani :
6590
Bashkir:
6665
Basque:
6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani:
6890
Bihari:
6672
Breton:
6682
Bulgarian:
6671
Burmese:
7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian:
7577
Cat alan:
Chinese :
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dut ch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnis h:
French :
Frisian:
G alician:
G eorgian:
G erman:
G reek:
G reenlandic:
G uarani:
6765
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
Gujarati:
7185
Hausa:
7265
Hebrew:
7387
Hindi:
7273
Hungarian:
7285
Icelandic:
7383
Indone sian:
7378
Interlingua:
7365
Irish:
7165
It alian:
7384
Japanese:
7465
Javanese:
7487
Kannada:
7578
Kashmiri:
7583
Kazakh:
7575
Kirghiz:
7589
Korean :
7579
Kurdish:
7585
Laotian:
7679
Latin :
7665
Latvian, Lett ish: 7686
Lingala:
7678
Li thuanian:
7684
Macedonian: 7775
Malagasy:
7771
Malay:
7783
Malayalam:
7776
Maltese:
7784
Maori:
7773
Marat hi:
7782
Moldavian:
7779
Mongolian:
7778
Nauru:
7865
Nepali:
7869
Norwegian:
7879
Oriya:
7982
Pasht o, Pushto: 8083
Persian:
7065
Polish:
8076
Portuguese:
8084
Punjabi:
8065
Q uechua:
8185
Rhaet o-Romance:
8277
Romanian:
8279
Russ ian:
8285
Samoan:
8377
Sans krit:
8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian:
8382
Serbo-Croa tian: 8372
Shona:
8378
Sindhi :
8368
Singhalese:
8373
Slovak:
8375
Slovenian:
8376
Somali:
8379
Spanish:
6983
Sundanese:
8385
Swahili:
8387
Swedish:
8386
Tagalog:
8476
Tajik:
8471
Tamil:
Tatar:
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tig rinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof :
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
RQT8415
71
Poruke
On
television
Na the
TV-u
Page
Stranica
≥
Program je zaš
tićen protiv kopiranja.
≥
You are trying
to pl ay the DivX VOD content t hat was purchase d with a di fferent
≥
Disk je pun.
regist ration code. You cannot play the content on thi s unit . (DivX)
≥
Pokuš
ali ste prikazati titlove sa drugačijim sistemom enkodiranja od onog koji je
Ne vidim titlove.
Cannot
finish
recording
≥
The programme was copy-protected.
trenutno
TV sistem
je druga
čiji odcompletely.
≥
The
HDD
may be f ull.
opcija.
podeš
en na
vašor
emdisc
TV-u
≥The maximum number of times you can record the program is exceeded.
Ne mogu zavrEšiti
Authorization
rror.
snimanje u cijelosti .
Cannot playback.
≥You tried to pl ay a tit le recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
TV system is different from the
system currently select ed on the unit.
Ne mogu
≥
Disk jeAlter
ogreben.
setti
ng. snimati na disk .
the “TV System” setting on this unit t o suit .
≥
Ne mož
ete formatirati M icrodrive ili prijenosne diskove na uređaju.
To
playback,
please
change
the
TV
Provjerite disk.
System
in Setup.
Ne mogu formatirati disk
—
38, 39
—
61
—
—
24
70
5
—
Cannot
record on the disc.
≥
The disc may be dirty or scratched.
10
Uređaj ne svira
.
≥
Pokušali. ste pustiti nekompatibilni disk
35
6
≥
IsključIte.uređaj I probajte ponovno
Unable to format.
Ne mogu snimati -disk je pun.
≥
Na pravite prostora brisanjem nepotre bnih pjesama. [RAM]
Cannot play on this unit.
≥
You tried to play a non-compat ible image.
32, 39,37
51
≥
T
urn
t
he
unit
off
and
re-insert
the
card.
13
Ne mogu snimati,max broj
≥
Koristite novi disk
—
je dosegnut pjesama
Cannot
record.
Di
sc
is
ful
l.
≥
[HDD]
[RAM]
[-RW‹V›]
[+RW]
Creat
e
space
by
deleting
any
unnecessary
title
s.
45, 50,
Došlo je do greške,
≥
Pritisnite [E NTER] za poč
procesa obnavljanja.
— 61
[Even if you delete etak
recorded
content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
pritisnite ENTER
Cannot record. Maxi mum number of(“SELF
na displ ayu).
no CHECK”
increasese
in prikazuje
disc space.
Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format ) and +RW
titles exceeded.
N o Disc
≥
Disk jeincreases
krivo okrenut.
only when the las t recorded title is deleted.]
—
≥Use a new disc.
—
No
N oDis
PCcCARD
N o SD CARD
No folders.
N o v alid PC card.
N oSD
v alid
SD card.
No
CARD
No
valid
S
D card.
Nema dovoljno prostora na
mjestu prijenosa .
Not enough space i n the copy
destination.
Please change the disc.
≥
The
disc
may
be upsideuređ
down.
≥
Kartica
nije
uneš
ena,ugasite
aj I ponovno ubacite karticu
≥
Unesena kartica nije kompatibilna.
≥
There is no compatible folder in t his unit.
1
6
≥The c ard is not inserted. I f this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted,prostor
turn off the
unit, removenepotrebnih
and t hen re-insert
the card.
≥napravite
brisanjem
stvari.
≥The c ard inserted is not compatible or the card format doe s not match.
46, 49
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
≥
Doš
lo je do problema sa diskom. Pritisnite [< OPEN/CLOSE] na glavnom uređaju za
izbacivanje,provjerite dali je ogreben ili prljav .
—
7, 37
13
32, 35, 39,
42, 51 7
45, 49,
5 50, 61
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list t o ensure that the “Dest ination
54, 57
not exceeded.
≥
Ure đajCapacity”
ne može is
snimati
na unešeni disk,unesite novi DVD-RAM.
—
≥
Unijeli ste neformatiran DVD-RAM. Formatirajte disk sa ovim uređajem.
Thi
This
s isdiascnon-recordable
is not properly disc.
≥
The unit cannot record on t he disc you in serted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalize d DVD- 5 1 4–5
formatted.
R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.
Thi
s disc i s not formatted properly. ≥You inserted an unformat ted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
Formatting is necessary using
61
Format
it usin g DVD
Management in ≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL dis c on thi s unit. Record to the
DI SC MANAGEM
ENT.
—
FUNCTIONS menu.
HDD
and
then
copy
to
the
disc.
≥
Operacija
je
zabranjena
.
—
$
This is a non-reco rdable disc.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough fre e space on the HDD
50
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 500.
≥Ako se
poruka
ne miče nakon
gašenja
uređaja,konzultirajte servisera
—
Delete
unwanted
title s from
the HDD.
Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 displayu
sata (i n SPure
mode)
is
Na
đaja
necessary.
HARD ERR
.
Maximum
number of ti tl es is
recorded
NO READon HDD. P lease delete ≥Uređaj je o štećen.
unnecessary ti tl es.
Rental Expired.
PROG FULL
$
R EMOTE
DVD 
5
—
≥
The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot pl ay it. (Div X)
≥Programirano je 16 vremenskih snimanja
.
≥
The
operatio
n
is
prohibited
by
t
he
unit
or
disc
.
≥
Daljinski upravljači uređaj imaju drugačije kodove
29
39
21 —
(“∑” broj.)
Pritisnite i držite [ENTER] i indikatorski gumb duž
e
od 2 sekunde.
SELF CHECK
≥
Uređaj se pali,pričekajte.poruka će sama nestati
U14
≥
Uređaj je vruć.
Pri č
ekajte dok se ure đaj ne ohladi i probajte ponovno.
U99
≥
Isklju č
ite te ponovno uključite uređaj
UNSUPPORT
≥Umetnulistenepodrž
andisk
X HO LD
≥Child Lock funkcija je aktivirana .
Pritisnite i drž
ite [ENTER] i [RETURN] istovremeno dok “X HOLD” ne nestane.
.
—
—
.
RQT841 5
72
—
9,10
64
Savjet
Ako Vašprobel sa uređajem ne riješe „poruke o greškama“,pogledajte sekciju „često postavljana pitanja“,te nakon toga i vodičkroz
pogreške.
RQT8415
73
Često postavljana pitanja
Pitanje
Stranica 17
What equipment is necessary to play
≥
DVD-Video:
multi
channel
surround
sound?
You
can
play
DVD-Video
multi
channe
l
surround
by
digitally
connecting
an
amplifier
≥
DVD-Video:
17
Koja je oprema potrebna za multikanalni
equipped with
aete
Dolby
Digit al, DTS or
MPEG decoder.
Mož
sviratiDVD-Video
multikanalni,spajanem
pojačala sa Dolby
zvuk?
—
≥
DVD-Audio:Digital, DTS ili MPEG dekoderom.
Thi s unit plays
DVD-Audio in 2 chan nels. You cannot play multi channel surround sound. —
≥
DVD-Audio:
DVD-Audio
etesvithrough
rati multikanlthe
ani zvuk
Are the headphones and speakers
≥
You cannotUređ
direcajtlysvira
connect
them tou 2
thekanla.
unit. Nemož
Connect
amplifie r etc.
17
directly connected to the unit?
The television has a Scart t erminal and
≥
If you have
a regular
elevisionspajati,spajate
(CRT: cathodeihray
tube)
we ala
recommend
≥
Nem.ož
etet direktno
preko
pojač
i slično using the Scart
1714–16
Dali su slušalice i zvuč
nici direktno
component video input terminal. Which
terminal. You can enjoy high -quality RGB video from this unit by connecting to an RGB
spojeni na uređaj?
should I connect wit h?
compatible television.
If you have
an LCD/
LC D projector
compatible
with
progressive scan, 15,
≥
Ako
imateplasma
običan television
TV (C RT) or
preporuč
ujemo koriš
tenje Scart
terminala.
TV ima Scart term inal i video ulaz. Sa
connect
through
the
component
v
ideo
terminals
for
high-qualit
y
progressive
video.
16
Mož
ete
už
ivati
u
vi
s
okokvalitetnim
sl
ikama
u
RGB
videu
ovog
uređ
aja
kojim terminalom da spojim uređaj?
If you have spajnjem
a CRT television
a mult i system
na RGB or
kompatibilni
TV. television using PAL mode that is
compatible Ako
wit himate
progressive
scan, Tv
we ilicannot
recommend
progressive
output as some
LCD/plasma
LCD pro
jek tor spojite
uređaje preko
flickering can
occur.
progresivnog
ulaza
Akotelevisions
imate CRTt hat
TV have
ili višesistemski
PAL· 50p,
mode525
preporuč
ujemo
koriš
tenje
—
Is my television progressive output
≥
All Panasonic
625 (576)/50i
(480)/60i
· 60p
input
terminals
compatible?
are compatible. Consul t the manufacturer if you have another brand of tel evision.
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and
Video
Dali CDs
je moj
bought
TV kompatibilan
in another country?
sa
progresivnim
Can
a DVD-Videoizlazom?
that does not have a
region number be played?
≥
You cannot
pl ayPanasonicovi
DVD-Video ifTV
t heir
region
not
include
“2” or· “ALL”.
≥
Svi
imaju
625number
(576)/50Idoes
· 50P
, 525
(480)/60I
Refer to the60P
disc’s
jacket for more
kompatibilne
ulazneinformation.
terminale
≥
The DVD-Video region number indicates the dis c conforms to a standard. You cannot pl ay
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot pl ay discs that do not conform to
a standard.
Di sk
Please tel l me about disc compatibilit y
≥
This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and
≥
Nem o
žete Video
sviratiRecording
DVD-Videoformat).
ako nemaju
regionalni
kod “2”
with
Mogu
this liunit.
svirati DVD-Video, DVD-Audio iplays DVD-RW
(DVD
However
you cannot
directly record to a
Video CD-e kupljene u drugoj zemlji? DVD-R DL ilior“AL
+R L”.
DL disc on thi s unit (playback and copy are possible).
≥
This unit also records and pl ays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
To nije
moguć
e discs.
Mogu li biti svirani DVD-i koji nemaju DVD-RW,≥
+R,
+R DL,
+RW
regionalni
Please
tel l mekod?
about CD-R and CD-RW
compatibility with this unit.
Kompatibilnost DVD-R i DVD-RW
Sa ovim uređajem.
≥
This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
standards:≥
CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and st ill
Uređaj snima i svira standardne DVD-R. No,ne možete snimati na
pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
DVD-R discskove koji su finalizirani.
≥
You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
Cover
—
—
4–6
Cover
— —
6, 37
9, 10
— —
≥
Uređaj ne svira niti ne snima na DVD-RW.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
Kompatibilnost CD-R i CD-RW
purchase
cassette or DVD?
Sa ovimd video
uređajem.
≥
Most commercia
sold CD-R/CD-RW
video cassettes
and DVD
copy
protod
ected;
recording
—
≥
Uređajllysvira
diskove
koji are
imaju
jedan
ovihtherefore,
standarda:
is usually not
possible.
10,33,
CD-DA,
MP 3 i Video CD. Zatvorite session ili finalizirajte disk.
35 —
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- ≥
You can play
≥
Nemož
on etesni
compatible
matina CD-R
equipment
ili CD -RW
suchsaasovim
DVDure
players
đajem.after finalizing t he disc on
Video f ormat), +R, +R DL and +RW
this unit. However, depending on the condit ion of the recording, the quality of the disc and
recorded on this unit be played on other
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
equipment?
≥
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
—
Snimanje
Can I record digit al audio signals using
≥
You cannot record digit al signals. The digital audi o terminals on thi s unit are for output
—
Mogu
≥
Večina tih diskova je zaštićena,pa će to biti neizvedivo.
—
this
unit?li snimati DVD-e iz videoteke
only. (The audio
recorded using the unit’s DV input terminal from a digital video
ili slič
no?
camcorder,. for example, is recorded digitally.)
—
Can
a edigital
audi osnimljen
signal f rom
unit
≥
You can record
if using t henPCM
When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
67
Mož
li DVD-R
nathis
ovom
≥
Mož
ete,samomoratefi
aliziratidissignal.
k
beuređ
recorded
to puš
other
equipment
?
Output ” s ettings t o t he following in the Set up menu.
aju biti
ten
na drugom?
–PCM Down Co nversion: On
—
–Dolby Digital /DTS/MPEG : PCM
Oko 100,000
puta
ovisno
o načinufrom
upotrebe.
Koliko puta mogu pisati na DVD-RAM However, ≥
only
as long as
digital
recording
the disc is permitted and the recording
diskove?
equipment is compatible wit h a sampl ing f requency of 48 kHz.
56
≥
You cannot record MP3 signals.
—
≥
Nemož
etesnimati.
Mogu li snimati digitalne audio signale sa
Can I switch to bi lingual broadcast
≥
With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [ AUDIO].
36
ovim uređajem?
during rec ording?
≥
With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot . Change before
67
recording with “Bilingual Audio Select ion” in the Setup menu.
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
≥
Yes, you can.
Mož
e li signal biti snimljen na drugom Depending
≥
Mo
ete
koristeć
PCM signal.
Kodvaries.
snimanja DV D, promijenite
onž
the snimati
disc t ype,
the imaximum
speed
“Digital Audio Output” opciju u SETUP meniju.
uređaju?
– PCM Down Conversion:
On
– Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
≥
Nemož
etesnimati MP3 signale
.
Mogu li promijeniti bilingual broadcast
tijekom snimanja?
RQT841 5
74
≥
Sa DVD-RAM, možete. pritisnite [AUDIO].
≥
Sa DVD-R, ne mož
ete
—
32
56
43
51
GUIDE Plus+
Zašto je GUIDE Plus+ sistem
dostupan samo nakon
Aproksimativno. 2 sata?
≥Podaci koji se šalju mogu biti drugačiji od uobičajenih,te je tako moguće da u određenom
—
trenutku sistem GUIDE+ bude spreman nakon određenog vremena.
RQT8415
75
Vodičkrozpogreš
ke
Before
request
ing service, make
the following
checks.
If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
Prije traž
enje servisa,prouč
ite vodičza
pogreš
ke.
do not solve the problem, cons ult your dealer for instruc tions.
Ovo ne uzrokuje problem sa ure đajem:
The following do not i ndi cate a problem with this unit:
≥
Regular
disc rot ating sounds.
≥
Operations
do not work due to a poor-quality dis c. (Try again using a
≥
Zvuk rotiranja diska,moguće je da se čuje glasnije kod
≥
Ometanje slike tijekom pretrage.
≥
Poor
receptio n due to atmospheric conditions.
Panasonic
disc.)
finaliziranja
DVD-R.
≥
Prekidi
u prijenosu
≥
Image
disturbance
during search.
≥
The
unittijekom
freezessnimanja,zbog
due to one ofprekida
i ts safety
devices being acti vated.
≥
e snimanje,zbog
vremenskih
uvjeta.
≥
IntLoš
erruptions
in reception
due to
periodic satellite broadcasting
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
breaks.
≥
When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode
napajanje
≥
A sound is heard when the HDD goes into SLEEP mode, or
(➡ 9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
Stranica
operations
are slow to respond in SLEEP
mode.
sound.
≥
Umetnite
AC kabel za napajanje u utič
nicu. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
Nema napaanja .
15, 16
≥
Pritisnite
[EXT
LINK]
29
Pow
er
Page
Uređaj ne reagira kod pritiska
.Insert the AC mains lead securely int o a known active household mains socket.
No
zapower.
paljenje .
≥
14, 15
≥
Linked t imer recordings wit h external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
33
The
unit does not turn on
display blinks
is pres
sed).
≥
Pritisnite
glavniwhen
gumb[Í
zaDVD]
paljenje
uređ
aja Press [EXT LINK] t o cancel the recording st andby.
.
—
Uređaj odlazi u stand by
press
ing [Í DVD].
mode.
The unit switches to standby mode. ≥One of the unit ’s safety devic es is act ivated. Press [Í/ I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.
—
Display
Di
splays
The
display
i s dim.
Zamra
čen je
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
di“0:00”
splay. je prikazano na
displayu.
The
time recorded on the disc
and the availabl e time shown do
Vrijeme
not
add up.odre đenih pjesama
The
na play
diskuti me
se ne
shown
prikazuje,ili
for MP3se
does
not agreenawith
actual
ne prikazuje
to čthe
an nač
in
time.
The clock is not correct.
Sat nije to čan
.
Compared to the act ual recorded
time, the elapsed time displayed
is l ess.
TV
i video
(Only
when reco rding in NTS C)
TV prijem
se pogorš
“U88”
is displ
ayed ava
andnakon
the disc
cannot
beuređ
ejected.
spajanja
aja.
Statusne poruke se ne
prikazu ju.
prikazuje se siva
TVNe
screen
and video
pozadina.
Tel evi sion recepti on worsens
after connecting the unit.
4:3 rezolucija se pro širuje i
slika je odrezana.
Status messages do not appear.
The grey background does not
appear.
Prikazuju se prošle slike za
Picture
does not appear during
vrijeme playbacka.
tim er recording.
The
aspect rati oDVDa
picture
Kod4:3
reprodukcije
na
expands
left andizlazu,dolazi
right.
progresivnom
do duple slike .
Screen size is wrong.
The recorded title is stretch ed
ver ti cally.
Nema promjene slike kod
podešavanja kvalitete slike.
There
is a lot of after-image
Slike sa ure đaja se ne
when
playing video.
prikazuju na TV -u
When
Slikapl
jeaying
lo ša . DVD-Video using
progressi ve output, one part of
the pi cture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.
There is no apparent change in
pi cture quali ty when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the onscreen menus.
The images from thi s unit do not
appear on the television.
Picture i s distor ted.
RQT841 5
76
≥
Change “FL“FL
Display”
in u
t he
Setup meniju
menu. .
≥
Promijenite
Display”
SETUP
≥
Set the clo ck.
≥
Podesite sat.
67
71
60
≥
Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥
Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format ) or +RW increases only when t he
≥
Vremena
se mogu
neslagati
trenutnim
vremenom.
las t recorded
title is
deleted.sa
It does
not increase
if other titles are deleted.
≥
Viš
e prostora
ostajerecorded
nakon snimanja
≥
Even
if you delete
cont ent DVD-R
from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
200
inc rease
ili viš
einputa.
disc space.
≥
Morepretrage,vrijeme
disc space thansethe
ual recording
time
≥
Kod
neact
mora
prikazati toč
no. is used after recording or edit ing t he DVD-R,
. DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥
While searching, the elapsed t ime may not display correc tly.
—
—
—
—
—
≥Under adverse reception conditions, etc ., the automatic time correctio n functio n may not
wo
rk. In thissat
case,
“Aut2-3
omatic”
is aut omatically
t urned
to “Off”.i sli
If č
re-sett
ing t mož
he Auto
≥Podesite
svakih
mjeseca,jer
zbog razlika
u naponu
nih stvari
e doClock
ć
i do
Sett ingke..
doe s not work, set the time manually.
pogreš
≥
The displayed recording/play time is converted f rom t he number of f rames at 29.97 frames
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There wil l be a slight difference bet ween the time
displayed and t he actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
Aproksimativnoima tely 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
≥
This
because
being divided
ween the
unit tand
≥
The can
unit occur
is carrying
out the signals
recoveryare
process.
Do the bet
following
to ejec
the other
disc.
1 Press [Í/I]
onbe
thesolved
main unit
to switch
thebooste
unit t or,stand
by. from audio-visual suppliers.
equipment.
I t can
by using
a signal
available
I f the unit doesn’t swit ch to standby, press and hold [ Í/I] on t he main unit for about 10
seconds.
The unit isu “On-Screen
forcibly switched
to standby.
≥
Odaberite
“Automatic”
Messages”
pod SETUP meniju.
] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
562 While the unit is off, press and hold [ ∫
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
71
60
≥
This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment .
I t can beTV
solved
by usingrezolucije,ako
a signal booster,
available
f rom
audio-visual
suppliers. If it is not
≥
Koristite
za promjenu
TV ne
sadrži tu
funkciju
promijenite
s olved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
“Progressive” u Picture meniju na “OFF”.
≥
Select “Automatic”
“On-Screen
Messages”
≥
Provjerite
opciju “TVinAspect”
u SETUP
men iju. in t he Setup menu.
≥
Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.
≥
Postavite “Pla yback NR” u Picture meniju na “OFF”.
≥
Timer recordings work regardle ss whet her t he unit is on or off. To confirm t he timer re cording
is going t o work properly, turn t he unit on.
≥
≥
Podesite
Use the tel
“Progressive”
evision to change
u Picture
themeniju
aspect.
naIf “OFF”.
your television
Ovaj se problem
does notjavlja
havezbog
that function,
načina set
“Progressive”
in the
Picture
menu to na
“Oovaj
ff”. način bi trebalo biti riješeno.
editiranja
samog
diska
DVD-Video,ali
≥
Check the settings for “TV Aspect ” in the Setup menu.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
37
67
20
67
—
37
43
68
≥
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4: 3 aspect in the following cases.
–If you recorded t o t he HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On”
in the
Setse
up slabije
menu.vide kod određene slike
≥
Neki
efekti
.
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format ), +R,
+R DL or +RW.
I t may be possible to adjust t he display mode on the TV. Refer t o your television’s operating
in structions.
66
≥
Set “Playback
the Pict
t o “Of
f”.
≥
Uvjerite
se da jeNR”
TV in
spojen
naure
AV1menu
terminal,
VIDEO
OUT terminal, S - VI DEO OUT
terminal ili COM PONENT VIDEO OUT terminals na uređaju.
≥
Set “Progressive”
in theulaza
Pict ure
menu
to AV
“Off”.
This
≥
Uvjerite
se da su opcije
TV-a
(npr.,
1) toč
ne.problem is cause d by the editing method
or materia l used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
≥
TV nije kompatibilan sa progresivnim signalima. Pritisnite i držite []i [TI ME SLIP]
na glavnom uređaju na 5 sekundi.
≥“TV System” uređaja ovisi o tipu televizora.
≥
The effect is les s perceivable with some types of video.
4316
15,
≥
Make sure t hat the television is connected to the AV1 terminal, VIDEO O UT t erminal,
S VI DEO OUT terminal or COMPO NENT VIDEO OUT terminals on this unit.
≥
Make sure t hat the television’s input sett ing (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
≥
Progressi ve output is set to on but the connected telev ision is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫
] and [ 1] (PLAY) on the mai n unit at the same time for more than 5
s econds to cancel t his sett ing. The setting will change to in terlace.
≥
The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV syst em used by t he disc now playing. While
s topped, keep pressing [∫
] and [< O PEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
14–16
43
—
—
61
—
—
—
70
Sound
Zvuk
Stranica
No
sound.
Nema
Low
volume.
zvuka.
Distorted
Stišano. sound.
Cannot
the desired audio
Zvuk sahear
distorzijom.
type.
Ne mogu čuti željen tip audia.
Ne mogu promijeniti audio
Cannot switch audio.
Operacije
Ne mogu raditi ništa sa
daljinskim upravlja čem
Page
≥
Check
the
connections
and
the
“Digital
Audio
Output”
settings.
Check
the
input
mode
on
the
≥
Provjerite kablove i opcije,uvjerite se d aje ispravan ulazni mode odabran.
1514–17,
–17,
amplifier[AUDIO]
if you have
connected
≥
Pritisnite
za odabir
audia.one.
5667
≥
Press
to select
t heč
audio.
≥
Ugasi
te V.[AUDIO]
S. S. u sljedeć
im slu
ajevima.
3236
≥
off V.S.S.
in the following
cases.
3743
–Turn
Kod koriš
tenja diskova
koji nemaju
surround efekte kao Karaoke diskovi.
usingbilingual
dis cs that
do not have surroun d sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
––When
Kod sviranja
programa.
–Whenmo
plž
aying
bili ngual
broadcast
programmes.
≥
diskovi
da imaju
određ
ene restrikcije,prouč
ite tehničke priručnike
≥[DVD-A] The disc may have a restrict ion on the met hod of audio output. When playing multi——
channel DVD-Audio, only audio for the two front channels will be output. Refer t o the disc’s
jacket .
≥Audio may not be output due to how f iles were creat ed. (DivX)
—
— 26
≥
Ne
mož
ete promijeniti
audiooruaslDVD-RAM
jedećim sluč
ajevima.
≥
If recording
to t he HDD
when
“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you
–can
Kadaonly
je DVD-R
u vratima
i kada
je DVD odabran.
record disk
either
the main
or secondary
audio of a bilingual broadcast.
56
–IfKada
snimanja
XP ithe
“Audio
for XP Recording”
en na
“LPCM”. format),
you je
domode
not intend
to copy
t it le Mode
to a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, podeš
DVD-RW
(DVD-Video
24
≥
Koristite
konekcije.
Podesite
“DolSpeed
by Digital”
na in“PCM”
ili spojite
koristeć
i audio
+R, +Rdigitalne
DL or +RW
set “Rec
for High
Copy”
the Setup
menu
to “Off”.
17, 56
kablove.
≥
You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format ), +R, +R DL or +RW dis c is in the
—
di sc tray while DVD drive is selected.
67
–When t he recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording ” is set to “LPCM”.
≥
Promijenite kod zemlje koji odgovara vašoj zemlji.
21
–When “Rec for High Spee d Copy” is set to “On”.
26
≥
Daljinski upravljači uređaj koriste drugačije kodove
≥
When connectin g an amplif ier using an optical digit al cable, you cannot switch the audio if
17, 67
21
“Dolby Digit al” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digi tal” to “PCM” or connect using audio
cables.
—
≥There are discs for which audio cannot
be ichanged
because
ofehow
disc was created.
Pritisnite
držite [ENTER]
duž
od 2t he
sekunde.
Operation
Cannot operate the televi sion.
≥
Changesut he
manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be opera ted even if you change the
≥
Baterije
prazne.
The remote control doesn’t work. ≥
code. na putu između uređaja i upravljač
Zapreka
a.
≥
The
remote contsenzor
rol andprema
main direktnom
unit are using
di fferent codes. Change t he code on the remot e
≥
Ne
usmjeravajte
suncu.
control.
≥
Child
lo ck funkcija je aktivirana.
—
21
21
54
23
23
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number butt on at the same
≥
Nisu točno definirani modeovi
zamore
snimanje/reprodukciju
t ime for
t han 2 seconds.
22 , 30
≥
Neke operacije su zabranjene od strane diska.
—
≥
Uređ
jeteries
vruć(“U14”
se pojavljuje
na dispalyu).
ekajte
dok “U14” ne nestane.
≥
Theajbat
are deplet
ed. Replace
them wit hČ
new
ones.
— 11
≥You are not point ing t he remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
——
operat ion.
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal recept ion/t ransmission.
—
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direc t sunlight or in areas t hat may be subject to sunlight
—
exposure.
≥It may be necessary to set t he code on t he remote control again af ter changing the batt eries.
23
≥It may be necessary to set t he manufacturer code again after changing t he batteries.
23
Ne mogu izbaciti disk.
≥
Isključite uređaj,te ga ponovno upalite,to bi trebalo riješiti problem.ako to ne rješava
—
≥
The
child
lock
function
is
activated.
64
r
problem,konzultirajte se sa osobljem kod kojeg ste kupili uređaj.
54
The unit is on but cannot be
≥Recording drive or pl ayback drive has not been selec ted properly.
24, 34
operated.
≥Some operat ions may be prohibited by the disc.
—
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on t he display ). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
—
≥
Provjerite
opcije
spajanja.
15, 16—
Ne mogu na ći kanlale. Ne
≥
One of the
unit’s
safety devices may have been activat ed.
≥
Morate
Link
function pomoću 21-pinskog
mogu downloadati kanale .
—
ResetspojitiTVsa
the unit asQfol
lows:
Scart
kabela.
1 Press
[Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t swit ch t o st andby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Snimanje,vremensko snimanje i transferiseconds.
(dubbin g)
Alternat ivel y, disconnect the AC mains lead, wa it one minute, then reconnect it.
Ne mogu snimati
≥Niste unijeli disk,ili ste ga unijeli na krivu stranu.
9
2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If t he unit still cannot be operated, consult the
≥
Disk nije formatiran,formatirajte ga. [RAM]
dealer.
51
≥
Zaštita je postavljena na PROTECT, ili je disk za š
tićen sa DISC MANAGEMENT.
50 9
HDD acti vation i s slow.
≥
Theprogrami
HDD is inimaju
SLEEP
mode.
(“SLEEP”
in the unit’s display. )
≥
Neki
određ
en broj
snimanjaappears
(CPRM).
≥
Disk
je
pun.
Cannot ej ect di sc.
≥The unit is recording.
—
68
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s 32, 39,
33
≥
Nemož
eteblinks
snimatiwhen
na finalizi
ranim is
diskovimaDVD-R.
display
[Í DVD]
pressed). Press [ EXT LINK] to cancel t he recordin g st andby. 51
. ≥The unit may have a problem. While t he unit is of f, press and hold [∫
] and [CH W] on the
— 64
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove t he disc and consult t he dealer.
If the Child Lock f unction is act ivated, above operatio n does not work. Cancel the Child Lock —
function.
Uređaj je upaljen,ali ne
može operirati .
Cannot tune channels.
Vremensko snimanje ne
Cannot
download
channel
radi toč
no.
presets from the televi sion.
VIDEO Pl us +
Sprogramiranje
tartup i s slow. ne radi .
Nastavak na sljedećoj stranici
Takes time to read DVD-RAM.
≥Check the connections.
≥
You mustpodeš
connect
to ai television
equipped with the Q Link func tion with a f ully wired 21-pin
≥
Provjerite
avanja
opcije.
Scart
cable
to download
channel
presets.
≥
Uređ
aj nije
u standby
modeu.
Pritisnite
[ TIMER].
≥
Podesite
sat.that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥
Make sure
≥Startup takes time in t he following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clo ck is not set.
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.
≥
I t may take time to read a disc if it is being used for the f irst t ime in this unit or it has not been
used for a long time.
14–15
—
29 —
26 –28
68
60
——
—
RQT8415
77
Vodičkroz pogreške
Play
Stranica
Recording,
timer recording and copying
Page
Cannot
Reprodukcija
record. ne po činje
≥
You disk
haven’t
inserted anač
disc
4, 4,
5 5
≥
Umetnite
na ispravan
in. or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
i kod pritiska
Cannot
copy.
unit
can
record
onto.DVD-RAM/DVD-R, ili nepodržan format.
≥
Pokuš
avate
pustiti
prazan
[ ] (PLAY)
The disc na
is unformat
ted.
Format
the (8Sati)”
disc. [RAM]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW]e na DVD
61 61
≥
Kod ≥
snimanja
DVD-RAM
koristeć
i “EP
mode,
puštanje
moguć
≥
The write-protect
tab on
the cartridge
is set to
PROTECT,
or nije
the disc
is protected with DVD
60 60
počinje,ali stane
playerima
kompatibilnim sa DVD-RAM. U ovom slučaju,koristite “EP (6Sati)” mode.
Management.
odmah.
≥
Ne m≥
ož
ete koristiti
play tijekom
automatskog
snimanja.
Some
programmes
have limitat
ions on the
number of t imes they can be recorded (CPRM).
81 81
≥
You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
45,45,
50,
it s limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
61
50,
≥
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
— 61
Re cord to the HDD and then copy to t he disc.
—
Audio i video se
≥
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary t it les from the
45, 50,
pauziraju.
≥
Pojavljuje
nakon
61
45,
HDDse
and
t hen prelaska
copy. sa poglavlja. [RAM
DVD-Video se ne prikazuje ≥Neki DVD-Video
–If there is ne
notmogu
enough
bitispace
pušteni
available
kod promjene
on the HDD
ratingsa
(If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
39
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 sata of SP mode recording
is necessary).
≥
Jezici
nisu
snimljeni
na disku.t itle s and the number of title s to be copied has exceeded 500.
—
Dodatni soundtrackovi ili
–If the
number
of recorded
titlovi ne mogu biti
≥
Mož
ste koristili
jezikand
za meni
——
≥
Youda
cannot
record
copy je.
on f inalized discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
Nema titlova.
≥
Disk
i titlove.
≥
Duene
to sadrž
peculiarit
ies of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
——
≥
Uključ
+RWite
you
titlove.
may be unable to record onto t hem if you ei ther in sert and remove the dis c or
30
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a t otal of f if ty times.
Kut se ne mijenja
.
≥
≥
Mož
DVD-R,
da disk
DVD-R
ne podrž
DL , ava
DVD-RW
tu funkciju
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorde
. d on this unit — —
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
—
≥
Thissuunit
cannot
to discs cont aining
both PALi and
NTSC
signals.
(However,
bot
h types
≥
Dok
vrata
diskarecord
otvorena,pritisnite
[DVD] pritisnite
držite
[]i []
na glavnom
uređ
aju
—
Zaboravili ste vašulozinku.
of viš
programmes
can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs rec orded with both PAL and
na
e od 5 sekundi.
NTSC on another unit is not guarant eed.
Qui ck Vi ew ne radi
.
≥
Ne
radi kada
je opcija
“Off” uis“PLAY
k1.3 & Audio during Search”.
45
≥
Check
that the
connection
correct.
14–15,
Cannot record from external
≥
Ne radi kada je audio drugačiji od Dolby Digital.
— 58
equipment.
≥
Select
channel u(“AV2”,
“AV3”,
“AV4”
or “DV”) for the equipment you have connect ed.
≥
Ne
radi the
kadainput
je snimljeno
X P ili FR
modeu.
[RAM]
——
≥
The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overla p. Correct the
31
TiFunkcija»nastavi
mer recording does
not
work
≥
Funkcija radi samo kada se prikazuje indikator kao na slici desno.
—
nakon
programme.
DVD- R A M
properly.
pauze»ne radi.
≥
Memorirana
pozicija
ne in
radi
nakon
gašenjastandby.
uređaja,tj.ona
se icon “F” in the timer recording
≥
The programme
is not
timer
recording
(The timer
31
poniš
—
list istava
not on.)
SHOWV IEW programming does not
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
work properly.
2 Press [ 3, 4] t o select the programme and press t he “Red” but ton.
≥
Set the clo ck.
71
≥
(If the
GUIDEnaPlus+
system is
set)
≥
Kod
spajanja
Multi-system
TV,
odaberite “NTS C” u “TV System” pod SETUP meniju.
48 21
Slika Video CD -a se ne
Thespajanja
G UIDE na
Plus+
downloaded
2:50
AM every
day. It takes
Aproksimativnoimat ely 2 —
≥
Kod
PALdata
TV, is
donji
dio slike seatne
prikazuje
točno,kod
pretrage.
prikazuje ispravno .
sata
t o complete data download. If you want to make t imer recordings during this t ime, set “Night
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ s yst em set up menu to “Off ”.
radi not. stop
≥
Funkcija ne radi kada je “TV System” drugačiji na ure đaju i disku.
48 31
TiOdbrojavanje
mer recordingnedoes
≥
Make sure t hat the recording drive is select ed. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
even when [∫
] i s pressed.
re cording drive.
33
≥
When using the linked timer recording with ext ernal equipment, press [ EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L”
disapjepears.
) istite ga.
—
Ne mogu formatirati.
≥
Disk
prljav,oč
≥
I f you avate
start recording
immediately after turning on the unit while “Qui ck Start” is set to “On”,
≥
Pokuš
formatirati disk koji nije kompatibilan sa ure đajem.
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
The timer programme remains
≥
The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
30
≥
Uređ
aj upisuje podatke kada prestajete sa radom. Informacije se neć
e zapisati ako je
Ne
mogu
even
afternapraviti
recordingpoglavlja.
finishes.
Ne mogu ozna čiti
A part
or whol enu
ofto
ač
recorded
poč
etnu/završ
ku kod
title
has Erase”
been lost.
“P
artial
operacije.
doš
lo do nestanka struje.
≥
I f there
is a power
failure or
plug
is disconnected
≥
Ovu
operaciju
je nemogu
ć
ethe
izvrš
iti kod
mirne slike. from the household mains socket while
re cording
editing,
t heke
title
beolost
or jthe
HDD/disc
≥
Ne
mo ž
ete or
odrediti
te toč
akomay
su ak
blizu
edna
drugoj. may become unusable.
—
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹ V›] [+RW] ) or use a new disc. We cannot of fer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.
61
Ne
obrisati
poglavlje.
Themogu
programme
name
and the
≥
Kada
poglavlje
prekratko
za brisanje,koristite
“Combine
Chapters”
za produljenje
≥
Therejewas
a programme
change
after timer recording
was set
but t he recorded
title st ill has
tpoglavlja.
he old programme name.
—
≥
When recprostor
ording za
to the
HDD,na
setDVD-R
“Rec forseHigh
Speedava
Copy”
to “On”dostupnih
in the Setup
menu.
≥
Dostupan
snimanje
ne poveć
brisanjem
stvari
na
≥
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in EP or FR (recordings 5 sata or longer) mode, you cannot
disku.
26
—
recorded ti tl e do not match.
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
Preostalo vrijeme za
di sc using the hi gh speed mode.
snimanje se ne produ žuje
nakon brisanja diska.
Ne mogu napraviti playlistu
—
≥
.Ne mož
ete odrediti sva poglavlja odj ednom,probajte poglavlje po poglavlje
—
Ne prikazuje se Direct
Navigator ekran.
≥
Use a dis c that is compat ible with high speed recording. Even if t he disc is high speed
re cording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condit ion of the
disc.
≥
I t takes longer than normal t o copy many titles.
≥
Ovaj
ekran se
nespeed
prikazuje
snimanja
(dubbing)
dok when
uređajusing
č
ekaother
za poč
etak
≥
You cannot
high
copytijekom
to DVD-R
titles longer
than 6ilisata
Panasonic
snimanja
sa nekog
ure đ
aja.
DVD Recorders
thatvanjskog
are not compat
ible wit h EP (8 Sata) mode recording.
An mogu
unusually
loud sound
is
Ne
formatirati
karticu
.
≥
When rec
or kartice.
high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
≥
Maknite
zaording
š
titu sa
—
Sadr
žaj automat
kartice se
ne
The DV
ic recording
mo
function
že učitati.
does not work.
≥
Format
kartice
nije
ure
đajem is aborted, check the connections and DV
≥
If images
cannot
bekompatibilan
recorded or ifsathe
recording
58
When copying, i t take s a long
tim e even when high speed
modeslike
is selected.
Mirne
coming from the rotati ng DVD-R,
etc.
Transfer i kopiranje traje dugo
vremena
RQT841 5
78
perform high-speed copy.
≥
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy t o +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-spee d copy.
PC kartica se ne može
izvaditi.
—
—
f ormat), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the dis c rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.
equipment sett ings.
≥
You cannot koristeć
st art recording
the16
images
the DVuređ
equipment
appear on the television.
Formatirajte
i FAT 12until
ili FAT
pomofrom
ć
u ostalih
aja.
≥
Recording
not be performed
desired
if t he timeure
codes
on the t ape
in t he DV
≥
Kartica
sadrmay
ž
i strukturu
direktorijaas
koja
nije dostupna
đ
aju(formati
datoteka
nisu
equipment
are not successive.
podrž
ani).
≥
Depending
on
the
equipment,
the
DV
automatic
recording
may
not
operate
properly.
≥
Isk.ljuč
ite uređaj i pokrenite ga ponovno
≥
The audio/video
recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.
≥
Ako ima puo mapa mo ž
e potrajati i do nekoliko sati.
.
—
—
—
58
Termini
Dekoder
Dekoder vrać
a kodirani signal sa DVD-a na normalan zvuk.
Dolby Digital
Ovo je metoda kodiranja napravljena od Dolby
Laboratories. Odvaja stereo zvuk (2-kanala) od ostalih
kanala,velike količ
ine podataka se mogu č
uti preko ove
metode
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Ovaj zvuk se koristi u mnogim kinima,kazališ
tima i ostalo.
Dynamic range
On predstavlja razmak izmeđ
u najviše frekvencije koju
mož
emo č
uti i izobličenja zvuka.
Film i video
DVD filmovi su obično snimljeni u tehnici 24 sličise po
sekund,dok su video filmovi snimljeni oko 30 slič
ica u
sekundi.
Mirna slika
Sličice predstavljaju zapravo sliku,slijed slika daje film.One
se prikazuju oko 30 po sekundi.
Do mirne slike dolazi kada pauzirate sliku,tada se prikazuje
samo jedna slič
ica koja je mirna..
.
Chasing playback
Nema potrebe za č
ekanjem da se određeni program snimi,većmož
ete
gledati istovremeno dio koji se snima i neki drugi program.
Simultaneous Recording and Playb ack
Dok snimate,mož
ete gledati materijal koji se snimio prije..
Time Slip
Tijekom reprodukcije možete promijeniti vrijeme prikaza,te otići na bilo koji dio
diska.
Interlace and progressive output
NTSC video signal ima 480 skeniranih linija. To se zove 480P. Video ima
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminale (Y, P B , P R) koji su puno kvalitetniji nego
VIDEO OUT terminali ili S-VIDEO OUT terminali.
RQT8415
79
Specifikacije
Sistem snimanja
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Diskovi za snimanje
DVD-RAM:
Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver. 2.2/5X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
DVD-R:
for G eneral Ver. 2.0
for G eneral Ver. 2.0/4X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for Gene ral Ver.2. x/8X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0 for
General Ver.2.x/16X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0 for
DL Ver.3.0
for DL Ver.3.x/4X-SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1. 0
DVD-RW:
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.x/ 2X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.x/ 4X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
Ver. 1.x/ 6X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 3.0
+R:
+RW:
Vrijeme snimanja
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.3
for DL Ver.1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver.1.2/ 4X-SPEED
Max. 8 sati (za 4.7 GB diskove)
XP: Aproksimativno. 1 sat,
SP: Aproksimativno. 2 sata
LP: Aproksimativno. 4 sata,
EP: Aproksimativno. 6 sati/8 sata
Maximum Aproksimativno. 284 sata sa 160 GB HDD (EP 8 sata
mode) XP: Aproksimativno. 36 sata,
SP: Aproksimativno. 70 sata
LP: Aproksimativno. 138 sata,
EP: Aproksimativno. 212 sata/ 284 sata
Diskovi za reprodukciju
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3, JPEG, DivX
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format , DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,
CD-R/CD- RW (CD- DA, Video CD, SVCD §1, MP3, JPEG, DivX formatted discs)
SVCD §1
LAS ER specifikacije
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Valna duljina:
CD
780 nm wave length
DVD
662 nm wave length
Snaga lasera:
Ne emitira se štetno zračenje.
NORS K
Bølgelengde:
CD
780 nm
DVD
662 nm
Laserstyrke:
Ingen farlig stråling sendes ut
Audio
Sistem snimanja: Dolby Digi tal 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
Audio ulaz:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Ulazni nivo:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Ful l scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Ulazna impedancija:
Više od 10 k≠
Audio izlaz:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Izlazni nivo:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Ful l scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Izlazna impedancija:
Manje od 1 k≠
Digit alni audio izlaz: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS,
RQT841 5
80
Video
Video sistem:
SECAM (samo ulaz)/PAL signal u boji, 625 linija, 50 polja
NTSC signal u boji, 525 linija, 60 polja
Sistem sni,amka:
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Video in (SECAM/PAL/ NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/ AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠
, termination
S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/ NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠
, terminat ion
RG B in (PAL):
AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠
, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠
, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S t erminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠
, terminat ion
RG B out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠
, terminat ion
Video izlaz (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠
, terminat ion
PB: 0. 7 Vp-p 75 ≠
, terminat ion
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠
, terminat ion
Sistem televizije
Sistem
Pokrivanje kanala
PAL-BGH
SECAM-BG
(CCIR)
VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy)
UHF: 21–69
CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),
S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41
SECAM-L, L’ §2
(France)
VHF: 2–10
UHF: 21–69
CATV: B–Q (100.5 t o 299 .5 MHz),
S21–S41 (299.5 to 467 .25 MHz)
SD kartica
Fotografije (JPEG, TIFF)
SD Memory Card slo t: 1 pc Compatible media:
SD Memory Card§3 , MultiMediaCard Format:
FAT12, FAT16
Image file format:
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File sistem),
(sub sampling; 4:2:2 ili 4: 2:0)
TIFF (Nekompresirani RGB chun ky), DPOF Compatible
Broj piksela:
34 a 34 to 6144 a 4096
Thawing time:
Aproksimativno. 3 sec (6 M pixels
JPEG)
Ostalo
Regionalni kod:
‚2
Temperatura:
5 to 40 oC
Vlaga:
10 do 80 % RH (bez kondenzacije)
Napajanje:
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Potrošnja:
Aproksimativno. 31 W
Dimenzije (W*D*H): Aproksimativno.430mm*329mm*58mm
Masa:
Aproksimativno. 4.2 kg
Potrošnja u standby modeu: Aproksimativno . 2 W (Power
Save mode)
Sigurne upute
Pozicioniranje
Postavite uređaj na ravne površine,izbjegavajuć
i
vlagu,direktno sunce ili promjene temperatura.. Ovi uvjeti
mogu oštetiti uređaj,te mu smanjiti vijek trajanja.
Ne stavljajte teš
ke predmete na uređaj.
Napon
Ne koristite visokonaponske izvore,mogu pregrijati uređ
aj i
izazvati pož
ar.
Ne koristite istosmjerne izvore napona
AC zaštita
Upozorenje
Ne umetajte nikakve predmete unutež
ar samog
uređaja,mož
e doći doć
i do kratkog spoja,strujnog udara i
požara.
Ne prskajte uređaj sa sprejevima š
tetnim za
ure đaj,insekticidi i ostalo.
Nikada ne pokuš
avajte sami popraviti uređaj,većga
odnesite u servis.
Servis
Servis: Nikada ne pokuš
avajte sami popraviti uređ
aj,ako se pojavi
problem koji nije opisan u ovom priruč
niku,isključ
ite uređaj,te
kontaktirajte najbliž
eg servisera.
Zaš
tita napajanja:Uvjerite se da je kabel za napajanje č
itav,te da mu
nigdje ne fali izolacija,loš
a povezanost mož
e dovesti do električ
nog udara,ili
č
ak i pož
ara
Manufact ured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratorie s.
“DTS” and “DTS 2.0iDigital Out” are t rademarks of Digital
Theat er Systems, Inc.
MPEG Layer -3 audio decoding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protect ed by U.S. pat ent s and other int ellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright prot ection technology must be authorized
by Macrovis ion, and is in tended for home and other limited
consumer uses only unless otherwise aut horized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or di sassembly is prohibited.
≥SD logo is a trade mark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
GUIDE Plus+, SHOW VIEW are (1) regis tered trademarks or
t rademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3)
subje ct of various international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed t o, Gemst ar-TV Guide I nternat ional , Inc .
and/or its related affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY
WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE
PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED
BY THE GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT
SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC.
AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FO R
ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF
ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, O R SERVICES
RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM.
Officia l DivX Certified™ product.
Plays DivX® 5, DivX® 4, DivX® 3, and DivX® VOD video content (in
compliance with DivX Certified™ technical requirements).
DivX, DivX Certif ied, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, I nc. and are used under license.
RQT8415
81
Environment f riendly prin ted on chlorine free bleached paper.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/
RQT8415-L
F0106EN0
Download PDF

advertising